Automatic Transmission

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 350

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION GI

MA

SECTION AT EM

LC

EC

FE
CONTENTS
CL
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INDEX ....................................4 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - GENERAL
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC ...........................4 DESCRIPTION ...............................................................81
PRECAUTIONS ...............................................................6 Symptom Chart..........................................................81 MT
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System TCM Terminals and Reference Value........................92
(SRS) ″AIR BAG″ ........................................................6 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY..........96
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD) Wiring Diagram - AT - MAIN......................................96
AT
System of A/T and Engine...........................................6 DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH .....99
Precautions ..................................................................7 Description .................................................................99 TF
Service Notice or Precautions .....................................8 Wiring Diagram - AT - PNP/SW...............................101
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis.....................9 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................102
PREPARATION .............................................................10 Component Inspection.............................................104 PD
Special Service Tools ................................................10 DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR
OVERALL SYSTEM ......................................................12 CIRCUIT .......................................................................105
A/T Electrical Parts Location .....................................12 Description ...............................................................105 FA
Circuit Diagram ..........................................................13 Wiring Diagram - AT - FTS ......................................107
Cross-sectional View .................................................14 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................108
Hydraulic Control Circuit............................................15 Component Inspection.............................................110 RA
Shift Mechanism ........................................................16 DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.A/T
Control System ..........................................................25 (REVOLUTION SENSOR) ........................................... 111
Control Mechanism....................................................26 Description ............................................................... 111
BR
Control Valve .............................................................31 Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSA/T ................................113
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................114 ST
DESCRIPTION ...............................................................33 Component Inspection.............................................115
Introduction ................................................................33 DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL .......................116
OBD-II Function for A/T System................................33 Description ...............................................................116 RS
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II ..............33 Wiring Diagram - AT - ENGSS ................................118
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) ....................33 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................119
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)..............................37 DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR BT
CONSULT ..................................................................37 POSITION ....................................................................121
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT.................46 Description ...............................................................121
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - INTRODUCTION..................53 Wiring Diagram - AT - 1ST ......................................124 HA
Introduction ................................................................53 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................125
Work Flow..................................................................57 Component Inspection.............................................126
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS - BASIC INSPECTION ...........59 DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR
EL
A/T Fluid Check .........................................................59 POSITION ....................................................................127
Stall Test ....................................................................59 Description ...............................................................127 IDX
Line Pressure Test.....................................................62 Wiring Diagram - AT - 2ND......................................130
Road Test...................................................................63 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................131
Component Inspection.............................................132
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR Wiring Diagram - AT - BA/FTS ................................197
POSITION ....................................................................133 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................198
Description ...............................................................133 Component Inspection.............................................200
Wiring Diagram - AT - 3RD......................................136 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR.MTR................................201
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................137 Description ...............................................................201
Component Inspection.............................................138 Wiring Diagram - AT - VSSMTR..............................203
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................204
POSITION ....................................................................139 DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT
Description ...............................................................139 (ROM)...........................................................................205
Wiring Diagram - AT - 4TH ......................................143 Description ...............................................................205
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................144 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................206
Component Inspection.............................................149 DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEPROM) ..............................207
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH Description ...............................................................207
SOLENOID VALVE......................................................150 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................208
Description ...............................................................150 TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS ...............209
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCV......................................152 Wiring Diagram - AT - NONDTC .............................209
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................153 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On....212
Component Inspection.............................................154 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position..214
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION ......155 3. In ″P″ Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or
Description ...............................................................155 Backward When Pushed .........................................215
Wiring Diagram - AT - TCCSIG ...............................158 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves ..............................216
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................159 5. Large Shock. N -> R Position .............................218
Component Inspection.............................................164 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE ...165 Position ....................................................................220
Description ...............................................................165 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1
Wiring Diagram - AT - LPSV....................................167 Position ....................................................................223
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................168 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 ...................226
Component Inspection.............................................169 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 -> D2 Or Does Not
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A ..................171 Kickdown: D4 -> D2..................................................229
Description ...............................................................171 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 -> D3.............................232
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/A ..................................173 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> D4 .............................235
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................174 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up .........................238
Component Inspection.............................................175 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition ..............240
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B ..................176 14. Lock-up Is Not Released...................................242
Description ...............................................................176 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light
Wiring Diagram - AT - SSV/B ..................................178 Braking D4 -> D3).....................................................243
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................179 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 .......................245
Component Inspection.............................................180 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 -> D3, When
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR ...........181 Overdrive Control Switch ON -> OFF .....................246
Description ...............................................................181 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 -> 22, When Selector
Wiring Diagram - AT - TPS......................................184 Lever D -> 2 Position ..............................................247
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................185 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 -> 11, When Selector
Component Inspection.............................................189 Lever 2 -> 1 Position ...............................................248
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine
VALVE..........................................................................190 Brake........................................................................249
Description ...............................................................190 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,
Wiring Diagram - AT - OVRCSV..............................192 Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches
Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................193 Circuit Checks) ........................................................249
Component Inspection.............................................194 A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM.........................................257
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP Description ...............................................................257
SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM POWER SOURCE) ....195 Wiring Diagram - SHIFT -........................................258
Description ...............................................................195 Diagnostic Procedure ..............................................259

AT-2
CONTENTS (Cont’d)
GI
Component Check ...................................................261 Control Valve Lower Body .......................................300
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE ..........................................262 Reverse Clutch ........................................................302
Components.............................................................262 High Clutch ..............................................................306 MA
Removal...................................................................262 Forward and Overrun Clutches ...............................308
Installation................................................................263 Low & Reverse Brake..............................................312
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE ..............................................264 Forward Clutch Drum Assembly..............................316
EM
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators.............264 Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub ..........318
Revolution Sensor Replacement .............................265 Band Servo Piston Assembly ..................................321
LC
Rear Oil Seal Replacement.....................................265 Parking Pawl Components ......................................325
Parking Components Inspection..............................265 ASSEMBLY..................................................................327
Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment .....265 Assembly (1)............................................................327 EC
Manual Control Linkage Adjustment........................266 Adjustment ...............................................................334
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION ...............................267 Assembly (2)............................................................337
Removal...................................................................267 SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS) .......344 FE
Installation................................................................268 General Specifications.............................................344
OVERHAUL .................................................................270 Shift Schedule..........................................................344
Components.............................................................270 Stall Revolution........................................................344 CL
Oil Channel ..............................................................272 Line Pressure...........................................................344
Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers Return Springs.........................................................345
and Snap Rings .......................................................273 Accumulator O-ring..................................................346 MT
DISASSEMBLY............................................................274 Clutches and Brakes ...............................................346
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS .........................285 Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch ........................348
AT
Oil Pump ..................................................................285 Total End Play..........................................................348
Control Valve Assembly...........................................289 Reverse Clutch Drum End Play ..............................349
Control Valve Upper Body .......................................295 Removal and Installation .........................................349 TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-3
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC

Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC NEAT0179


ALPHABETICAL INDEX FOR DTC NEAT0179S01

DTC
Items
CONSULT Reference page
(CONSULT screen terms) ECM*1
GST*2

A/T 1ST GR FNCTN 1103 P0731 AT-121

A/T 2ND GR FNCTN 1104 P0732 AT-127

A/T 3RD GR FNCTN 1105 P0733 AT-133

A/T 4TH GR FNCTN 1106 P0734 AT-139

A/T TCC S/V FNCTN 1107 P0744 AT-155

ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC 1208 P0710 AT-105

ENGINE SPEED SIG 1207 P0725 AT-116

L/PRESS SOL/CIRC 1205 P0745 AT-165

O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC 1203 P1760 AT-190

PNP SW/CIRC 1101 P0705 AT-99

SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 1108 P0750 AT-171

SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 1201 P0755 AT-176

TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 1206 P1705 AT-181

TCC SOLENOID/CIRC 1204 P0740 AT-150

VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4 1102 P0720 AT-111

*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates.
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.

AT-4
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INDEX
Alphabetical & P No. Index for DTC (Cont’d)
P NO. INDEX FOR DTC =NEAT0179S02
GI
DTC
Items
CONSULT Reference page
(CONSULT screen terms)
GST*2
ECM*1 MA
P0705 1101 PNP SW/CIRC AT-99

P0710 1208 ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC AT-105


EM
P0720 1102 VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT*4 AT-111

P0725 1207 ENGINE SPEED SIG AT-116


LC
P0731 1103 A/T 1ST GR FNCTN AT-121

P0732 1104 A/T 2ND GR FNCTN AT-127


EC
P0733 1105 A/T 3RD GR FNCTN AT-133

P0734 1106 A/T 4TH GR FNCTN AT-139


FE
P0740 1204 TCC SOLENOID/CIRC AT-150
CL
P0744 1107 A/T TCC S/V FNCTN AT-155

P0745 1205 L/PRESS SOL/CIRC AT-165


MT
P0750 1108 SFT SOL A/CIRC*3 AT-171

P0755 1201 SFT SOL B/CIRC*3 AT-176


AT
P1705 1206 TP SEN/CIRC A/T*3 AT-181

P1760 1203 O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC AT-190


TF
*1: In Diagnostic Test Mode II (Self-diagnostic results), these numbers are controlled by NISSAN.
*2: These numbers are prescribed by SAE J2012.
*3: When the fail-safe operation occurs, the MIL illuminates. PD
*4: The MIL illuminates when both the “Revolution sensor signal” and the “Vehicle speed sensor signal” meet the fail-safe condition at
the same time.

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-5
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) “AIR BAG”

Precautions for Supplemental Restraint System


(SRS) “AIR BAG” NEAT0001
The Supplemental Restraint System “AIR BAG”, used along with a seat belt, helps to reduce the risk or severity
of injury to the driver and front passenger in a frontal collision. The Supplemental Restraint System consists
of air bag modules (located in the center of the steering wheel and on the instrument panel on the passen-
ger side), a diagnosis sensor unit, a crash zone sensor, warning lamp, wiring harness and spiral cable.
The vehicle is equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch. Because no rear seat exists where a
rear-facing child restraint can be placed, the switch is designed to turn off the passenger air bag so that a
rear-facing child restraint can be used in the front passenger seat. The switch is located in the center of the
instrument panel near the ashtray. When the switch is turned to the ON position, the passenger air bag is
enabled and could inflate in a frontal collision. When the switch is turned to the OFF position, the passenger
air bag is disabled and will not inflate in a frontal collision. A passenger air bag OFF indicator on the instru-
ment panel lights up when the passenger air bag is switched OFF. The driver air bag always remains enabled
and is not affected by the passenger air bag deactivation switch.
Information necessary to service the system safely is included in the RS section of this Service Manual.
WARNING:
I To avoid rendering the SRS inoperative, which could increase the risk of personal injury or death
in the event of a collision which would result in air bag inflation, all maintenance should be per-
formed by an authorized NISSAN dealer.
I Improper maintenance, including incorrect removal and installation of the SRS, can lead to per-
sonal injury caused by unintentional activation of the system.
I Do not use electrical test equipment on any circuit related to the SRS unless instructed to in this
Service Manual. SRS wiring harnesses are covered with yellow insulation either just before the
harness connectors or for the complete harness, for easy identification.
I The vehicle is equipped with a passenger air bag deactivation switch which can be operated by
the customer. When the air bag is switched OFF, the passenger air bag is disabled and will not
inflate in a frontal collision. When the passenger air bag is switched ON, the passenger air bag is
enabled and could inflate in a frontal collision. After SRS maintenance or repair, make sure the
passenger air bag deactivation switch is in the same position (ON or OFF) as when the vehicle
arrived for service.
Precautions for On Board Diagnostic (OBD)
System of A/T and Engine NEAT0002
The ECM has an on board diagnostic system. It will light up the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) to warn the
driver of a malfunction causing emission deterioration.
CAUTION:
I Be sure to turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the negative battery terminal before any
repair or inspection work. The open/short circuit of related switches, sensors, solenoid valves, etc.
will cause the MIL to light up.
I Be sure to connect and lock the connectors securely after work. A loose (unlocked) connector will
cause the MIL to light up due to an open circuit. (Be sure the connector is free from water, grease,
dirt, bent terminals, etc.)
I Be sure to route and secure the harnesses properly after work. Interference of the harness with a
bracket, etc. may cause the MIL to light up due to a short circuit.
I Be sure to connect rubber tubes properly after work. A misconnected or disconnected rubber tube
may cause the MIL to light up due to a malfunction of the EGR system or fuel injection system,
etc.
I Be sure to erase the unnecessary malfunction information (repairs completed) from the TCM and
ECM before returning the vehicle to the customer.

AT-6
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions

Precautions NEAT0003
GI
I Before connecting or disconnecting the TCM harness
connector, turn ignition switch OFF and disconnect nega-
tive battery terminal. Failure to do so may damage the
TCM. Because battery voltage is applied to TCM even if MA
ignition switch is turned off.
EM

LC
SEF289H

I When connecting or disconnecting pin connectors into or


from TCM, take care not to damage pin terminals (bend or EC
break).
Make sure that there are not any bends or breaks on TCM
pin terminal, when connecting pin connectors. FE

CL

MT
AAT470A

I Before replacing TCM, perform TCM input/output signal


inspection and make sure whether TCM functions prop- AT
erly or not. (See page AT-92.)

TF

PD

FA
MEF040DA

I After performing each TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS, perform


“DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code) CONFIRMATION PROCE- RA
DURE”.
The DTC should not be displayed in the “DTC CONFIRMA-
TION PROCEDURE” if the repair is completed. BR

ST

RS
SAT964I

I Before proceeding with disassembly, thoroughly clean the out-


side of the transmission. It is important to prevent the internal BT
parts from becoming contaminated by dirt or other foreign mat-
ter.
I Disassembly should be done in a clean work area.
HA
I Use lint-free cloth or towels for wiping parts clean. Common
shop rags can leave fibers that could interfere with the opera- EL
tion of the transmission.
I Place disassembled parts in order for easier and proper
assembly. IDX
I All parts should be carefully cleaned with a general purpose,

AT-7
PRECAUTIONS
Precautions (Cont’d)
non-flammable solvent before inspection or reassembly.
I Gaskets, seals and O-rings should be replaced any time the
transmission is disassembled.
I It is very important to perform functional tests whenever they
are indicated.
I The valve body contains precision parts and requires extreme
care when parts are removed and serviced. Place disas-
sembled valve body parts in order for easier and proper
assembly. Care will also prevent springs and small parts from
becoming scattered or lost.
I Properly installed valves, sleeves, plugs, etc. will slide along
bores in valve body under their own weight.
I Before assembly, apply a coat of recommended ATF to all
parts. Apply petroleum jelly to protect O-rings and seals, or
hold bearings and washers in place during assembly. Do not
use grease.
I Extreme care should be taken to avoid damage to O-rings,
seals and gaskets when assembling.
I Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil
pan or clogging strainer. Refer to “ATF COOLER SERVICE”
(Refer to AT-9).
I After overhaul, refill the transmission with new ATF.
I When the A/T drain plug is removed, only some of the fluid is
drained. Old A/T fluid will remain in torque converter and ATF
cooling system.
Always follow the procedures under “Changing A/T Fluid” in the
MA section when changing A/T fluid.

Service Notice or Precautions NEAT0004


FAIL-SAFE NEAT0004S01
The TCM has an electronic Fail-Safe (limp home mode). This allows the vehicle to be driven even if a major
electrical input/output device circuit is damaged.
Under Fail-Safe, the vehicle always runs in third gear, even with a shift lever position of “1”, “2” or “D”. The
customer may complain of sluggish or poor acceleration.
When the ignition key is turned “ON” following Fail-Safe operation, O/D OFF indicator lamp blinks for about
8 seconds. (For “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”, refer to AT-46.)
Fail-Safe may occur without electrical circuit damage if the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions (such
as excessive wheel spin followed by sudden braking). To recover normal shift pattern, turn the ignition key
“OFF” for 5 seconds, then “ON”.
The blinking of the O/D OFF indicator lamp for about 8 seconds will appear only once and be cleared. The
customer may resume normal driving conditions.
Always follow the “WORK FLOW” (Refer to AT-57).
The SELF-DIAGNOSIS results will be as follows:
The first SELF-DIAGNOSIS will indicate damage to the vehicle speed sensor or the revolution sensor.
During the next SELF-DIAGNOSIS, performed after checking the sensor, no damages will be indicated.
TORQUE CONVERTER SERVICE NEAT0004S04
The torque converter should be replaced under any of the following conditions:
I External leaks in the hub weld area.
I Converter hub is scored or damaged.
I Converter pilot is broken, damaged or fits poorly into crankshaft.

AT-8
PRECAUTIONS
Service Notice or Precautions (Cont’d)
I Steel particles are found after flushing the cooler and cooler lines.
I Pump is damaged or steel particles are found in the converter. GI
I Vehicle has TCC shudder and/or no TCC apply. Replace only after all hydraulic and electrical diagnoses
have been made. (Converter clutch material may be glazed.)
I Converter is contaminated with engine coolant containing antifreeze.
MA
I Internal failure of stator roller clutch.
I Heavy clutch debris due to overheating (blue converter). EM
I Steel particles or clutch lining material found in fluid filter or on magnet when no internal parts in unit are
worn or damaged — indicates that lining material came from converter.
The torque converter should not be replaced if: LC
I The fluid has an odor, is discolored, and there is no evidence of metal or clutch facing particles.
I The threads in one or more of the converter bolt holes are damaged.
EC
I Transmission failure did not display evidence of damaged or worn internal parts, steel particles or clutch
plate lining material in unit and inside the fluid filter.
I Vehicle has been exposed to high mileage (only). The exception may be where the torque converter clutch FE
dampener plate lining has seen excess wear by vehicles operated in heavy and/or constant traffic, such
as taxi, delivery or police use.
ATF COOLER SERVICE CL
NEAT0004S02
Replace ATF cooler if excessive foreign material is found in oil pan or clogging strainer.
Replace radiator lower tank (which includes ATF cooler) with a new one and flush cooler line using cleaning
solvent and compressed air.
MT

OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSIS NEAT0004S03


I A/T self-diagnosis is performed by the TCM in combination with the ECM. The results can be read through AT
the blinking pattern of the O/D OFF indicator or the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL). Refer to the table on
AT-38 for the indicator used to display each self-diagnostic result.
I The self-diagnostic results indicated by the MIL are automatically stored in both the ECM and TCM TF
memories.
Always perform the procedure “HOW TO ERASE DTC” on AT-35 to complete the repair and avoid
unnecessary blinking of the MIL. PD
I The following self-diagnostic items can be detected using ECM self-diagnostic results mode* only when
the O/D OFF indicator lamp does not indicate any malfunctions.
FA
− Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
− A/T 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear function
− A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) RA
*: For details of OBD-II, refer to EC section (“ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”).
I Certain systems and components, especially those related to OBD, may use a new style slide-
locking type harness connector. For description and how to disconnect, refer to EL section, BR
“Description”, “HARNESS CONNECTOR”.
Wiring Diagrams and Trouble Diagnosis NEAT0005
ST
When you read wiring diagrams, refer to the followings:
I “HOW TO READ WIRING DIAGRAMS” in GI section
RS
I “POWER SUPPLY ROUTING” for power distribution circuit in EL section
When you perform trouble diagnosis, refer to the followings:
I “HOW TO FOLLOW TEST GROUP IN TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS” in GI section BT
I “HOW TO PERFORM EFFICIENT DIAGNOSIS FOR AN ELECTRICAL INCIDENT” in GI section

HA

EL

IDX

AT-9
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools

Special Service Tools NEAT0006


The actual shapes of Kent-Moore tools may differ from those of special service tools illustrated here.

Tool number
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name

ST2505S001 Measuring line pressure


(J34301-C)
Oil pressure gauge set
1 ST25051001
( — )
Oil pressure gauge
2 ST25052000
( — )
Hose
3 ST25053000
( — )
Joint pipe
4 ST25054000
( — )
Adapter NT097
5 ST25055000
( — )
Adapter

ST07870000 Disassembling and assembling A/T


(J37068) a: 182 mm (7.17 in)
Transmission case stand b: 282 mm (11.10 in)
c: 230 mm (9.06 in)
d: 100 mm (3.94 in)

NT421

KV31102100 Checking one-way clutch in torque converter


(J37065)
Torque converter one-
way clutch check tool

NT098

ST25850000 Removing oil pump assembly


(J25721-A) a: 179 mm (7.05 in)
Sliding hammer b: 70 mm (2.76 in)
c: 40 mm (1.57 in) dia.
d: M12 x 1.75P

NT422

KV31102400 Removing and installing clutch return springs


(J34285 and J34285-87) a: 320 mm (12.60 in)
Clutch spring compres- b: 174 mm (6.85 in)
sor

NT423

AT-10
PREPARATION
Special Service Tools (Cont’d)

Tool number GI
(Kent-Moore No.) Description
Tool name

ST33200000 Installing oil pump housing oil seal Installing rear MA


(J26082) oil seal
Drift a: 60 mm (2.36 in) dia.
b: 44.5 mm (1.752 in) dia.
EM

NT091
LC
(J34291) Selecting oil pump cover bearing race and oil
Shim setting gauge set pump thrust washer
EC

FE
NT101

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-11
OVERALL SYSTEM
A/T Electrical Parts Location

A/T Electrical Parts Location NEAT0007

AAT566A

AT-12
OVERALL SYSTEM
Circuit Diagram

Circuit Diagram NEAT0008 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT609A
IDX

AT-13
OVERALL SYSTEM
Cross-sectional View

Cross-sectional View NEAT0010

SAT125BA

AT-14
OVERALL SYSTEM
Hydraulic Control Circuit

Hydraulic Control Circuit NEAT0011 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

SAT624GA
IDX

AT-15
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism

Shift Mechanism NEAT0012


The automatic transmission uses compact, dual planetary gear systems to improve power-transmission
efficiency, simplify construction and reduce weight.
It also employs an optimum shift control and superwide gear ratios. They improve starting performance and
acceleration during medium and high-speed operation.
Two one-way clutches are also employed: one is used for the forward clutch and the other for the low clutch.
These one-way clutches, combined with four accumulators, reduce shifting shock to a minimum.
CONSTRUCTION NEAT0012S01

SAT509I

1. Torque converter clutch piston 9. Front sun gear 17. Forward one-way clutch
2. Torque converter 10. Front internal gear 18. Overrun clutch
3. Oil pump 11. Front planetary carrier 19. Low one-way clutch
4. Input shaft 12. Rear sun gear 20. Low & reverse brake
5. Brake band 13. Rear pinion gear 21. Parking pawl
6. Reverse clutch 14. Rear internal gear 22. Parking gear
7. High clutch 15. Rear planetary carrier 23. Output shaft
8. Front pinion gear 16. Forward clutch

AT-16
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
FUNCTION OF CLUTCH AND BRAKE =NEAT0012S02
GI
Clutch and brake components Abbr. Function

Reverse clutch 6 R/C To transmit input power to front sun gear 9.


MA
High clutch 7 H/C To transmit input power to front planetary carrier 11.

Forward clutch 16 F/C To connect front planetary carrier 11 with forward one-way
clutch 17.
EM
Overrun clutch 18 O/C To connect front planetary carrier 11 with rear internal gear 14.

Brake band 5 B/B To lock front sun gear 9.


LC
Forward one-way clutch 17 F/O.C When forward clutch 16 is engaged, to stop rear internal gear
14 from rotating in opposite direction against engine revolution. EC
Low one-way clutch 19 L/O.C To stop front planetary carrier 11 from rotating in opposite direc-
tion against engine revolution.
FE
Low & reverse brake 20 L & R/B To lock front planetary carrier 11.

CLUTCH AND BAND CHART NEAT0012S03 CL


Band servo For-
Low
For- Over- ward Low &
Shift posi- Reverse High
ward run one
one-
reverse Lock-up Remarks
MT
tion clutch clutch 2nd 3rd 4th way
clutch clutch -way brake
apply release apply clutch
clutch
AT
PARK
P
POSITION

REVERSE TF
R q q
POSITION

NEUTRAL
N
POSITION
PD
1st q *1D B B

2nd q *1A q B
Automatic FA
shift
D*4
3rd q q *1A *2C C B *5q 1k2k3
k4
RA
4th q C *3C C q q

1st q q B B Automatic
2 shift BR
2nd q q q B 1k2

1st q q B B q Locks (held


stationary) in ST
1
1st speed
2nd q q q B 1g2
RS
*1: Operates when overdrive control switch is being set in OFF position.
*2: Oil pressure is applied to both 2nd “apply” side and 3rd “release” side of band servo piston. However, brake band does not contract
because oil pressure area on the “release” side is greater than that on the “apply” side.
*3: Oil pressure is applied to 4th “apply” side in condition *2 above, and brake band contracts.
BT
*4: A/T will not shift to 4th when overdrive control switch is set in OFF position.
*5: Operates when overdrive control switch is OFF.
q : Operates. HA
A: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, activating engine brake.
B: Operates during “progressive” acceleration.
C: Operates but does not affect power transmission. EL
D: Operates when throttle opening is less than 3/16, but does not affect engine brake.

IDX

AT-17
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
POWER TRANSMISSION =NEAT0012S04
P and N Positions NEAT0012S0401
I P position
Similar to the N position, no control members operate. The parking pawl interconnected with the select
lever engages with the parking gear to mechanically hold the output shaft so that the power train is locked.
I N position
No control members operate. Power from the input shaft is not transmitted to the output shaft since the
clutch does not operate.

SAT039J

AT-18
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
11 Position =NEAT0012S0406
GI
Forward clutch As overrun clutch engages, rear internal gear is locked by the operation of low and
Forward one-way clutch reverse brake.
Overrun clutch This is different from that of D1 and 21. MA
Low and reverse brake

Engine brake Overrun clutch always engages, therefore engine brake can be obtained when decelerat-
ing. EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA
SAT100J

EL

IDX

AT-19
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
D1 and 21 Positions =NEAT0012S0402

Forward one-way clutch Rear internal gear is locked to rotate counterclockwise because of the functioning of
Forward clutch these three clutches. (Start-up at D1)
Low one-way clutch

Overrun clutch D1: Overdrive control switch in OFF


engagement conditions Throttle opening less than 3/16
(Engine brake) 21: Throttle opening less than 3/16
At D1 and 21 positions, engine brake is not activated due to free turning of low one-way
clutch.

SAT096J

AT-20
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
D2, 22 and 12 Positions =NEAT0012S0403
GI
Forward clutch Rear sun gear drives rear planetary carrier and combined front internal gear. Front inter-
Forward one-way clutch nal gear now rotates around front sun gear accompanying front planetary carrier.
Brake band As front planetary carrier transfers the power to rear internal gear through forward clutch MA
and forward one-way clutch, this rotation of rear internal gear increases the speed of rear
planetary carrier compared with that of the 1st speed.

Overrun clutch D2: Overdrive control switch in OFF EM


engagement conditions Throttle opening less than 3/16
22: Throttle opening less than 3/16
12: Always engaged LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

SAT097J
EL

IDX

AT-21
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
D3 Position =NEAT0012S0404

High clutch Input power is transmitted to front planetary carrier through high clutch. And front plan-
Forward clutch etary carrier is connected to rear internal gear by operation of forward clutch and forward
Forward one-way clutch one-way clutch.
This rear internal gear rotation and another input (the rear sun gear) accompany rear
planetary carrier to turn at the same speed.

Overrun clutch D3: Overdrive control switch in OFF


engagement conditions Throttle opening less than 3/16

SAT098J

AT-22
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
D4 (OD) Position =NEAT0012S0405
GI
High clutch Input power is transmitted to front carrier through high clutch.
Brake band This front planetary carrier turns around the sun gear which is fixed by brake band and
Forward clutch makes front internal gear (output) turn faster. MA
(Does not affect power transmission)

Engine brake At D4 position, there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line and engine
brake can be obtained when decelerating. EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-23
OVERALL SYSTEM
Shift Mechanism (Cont’d)
R Position =NEAT0012S0407

Reverse clutch Front planetary carrier is stationary because of the operation of low and reverse brake.
Low and reverse brake Input power is transmitted to front sun gear through reverse clutch, which drives front
internal gear in the opposite direction.

Engine brake As there is no one-way clutch in the power transmission line, engine brake can be
obtained when decelerating.

SAT101J

AT-24
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System

Control System =NEAT0013 GI


OUTLINE NEAT0013S01
The automatic transmission senses vehicle operating conditions through various sensors. It always controls
the optimum shift position and reduces shifting and lock-up shocks. MA
SENSORS TCM ACTUATORS

Park/neutral position (PNP) EM


switch Shift control
Throttle position sensor Line pressure control Shift solenoid valve A
Closed throttle position switch Lock-up control Shift solenoid valve B
LC
Wide open throttle position switch E Overrun clutch control E Overrun clutch solenoid valve
Engine speed signal Timing control Torque converter clutch sole-
A/T fluid temperature sensor Fail-safe control noid valve
Revolution sensor Self-diagnosis Line pressure solenoid valve EC
Vehicle speed sensor CONSULT communication line O/D OFF indicator lamp
Overdrive control switch Duet-EU control
ASCD control unit FE
CONTROL SYSTEM NEAT0013S02
CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

AAT471A
RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-25
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control System (Cont’d)
TCM FUNCTION =NEAT0013S03
The function of the TCM is to:
I Receive input signals sent from various switches and sensors.
I Determine required line pressure, shifting point, lock-up operation, and engine brake operation.
I Send required output signals to the respective solenoids.
INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL OF TCM NEAT0013S04

Sensors and solenoid valves Function

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch Detects select lever position and sends a signal to TCM.

Throttle position sensor Detects throttle valve position and sends a signal to TCM.

Closed throttle position switch Detects throttle valve’s fully-closed position and sends a signal to TCM.

Detects a throttle valve position of greater than 1/2 of full throttle and sends
Wide open throttle position switch
a signal to TCM.

Engine speed signal From ECM.

Input A/T fluid temperature sensor Detects transmission fluid temperature and sends a signal to TCM.

Revolution sensor Detects output shaft rpm and sends a signal to TCM.

Used as an auxiliary vehicle speed sensor. Sends a signal when revolution


Vehicle speed sensor
sensor (installed on transmission) malfunctions.

Sends a signal, which prohibits a shift to “D4” (overdrive) position, to the


Overdrive control switch
TCM.

Sends the cruise signal and “D4” (overdrive) cancellation signal from ASCD
ASCD control unit
control unit to TCM.

Selects shifting point suited to driving conditions in relation to a signal sent


Shift solenoid valve A/B
from TCM.

Regulates (or decreases) line pressure suited to driving conditions in rela-


Line pressure solenoid valve
tion to a signal sent from TCM.

Output Torque converter clutch solenoid Regulates (or decreases) lock-up pressure suited to driving conditions in
valve relation to a signal sent from TCM.

Controls an “engine brake” effect suited to driving conditions in relation to a


Overrun clutch solenoid valve
signal sent from TCM.

O/D OFF indicator lamp Shows TCM faults, when A/T control components malfunction.

Control Mechanism NEAT0180


LINE PRESSURE CONTROL NEAT0180S01
TCM has the various line pressure control characteristics to meet
the driving conditions.
An ON-OFF duty signal is sent to the line pressure solenoid valve
based on TCM characteristics.
Hydraulic pressure on the clutch and brake is electronically con-
trolled through the line pressure solenoid valve to accommodate
engine torque. This results in smooth shift operation.

AT-26
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Normal Control NEAT0180S0101
The line pressure to throttle opening characteristics is set for suit- GI
able clutch operation.
MA

EM

LC
SAT003J

Back-up Control (Engine brake) NEAT0180S0102


If the selector lever is shifted to “2” position while driving in D4 (OD) EC
or D3, great driving force is applied to the clutch inside the trans-
mission. Clutch operating pressure (line pressure) must be
increased to deal with this driving force. FE

CL

MT
SAT004J

During Shift Change


The line pressure is temporarily reduced corresponding to a
NEAT0180S0103
AT
change in engine torque when shifting gears (that is, when the shift
solenoid valve is switched for clutch operation) to reduce shifting
shock. TF

PD

FA
SAT005J

At Low Fluid Temperature


I
NEAT0180S0104
Fluid viscosity and frictional characteristics of the clutch facing
RA
change with fluid temperature. Clutch engaging or band-con-
tacting pressure is compensated for, according to fluid
temperature, to stabilize shifting quality.
BR

ST

RS

I The line pressure is reduced below 60°C (140°F) to prevent


shifting shock due to low viscosity of automatic transmission BT
fluid when temperature is low.
HA

EL

IDX
SAT006J

AT-27
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
I Line pressure is increased to a maximum irrespective of the
throttle opening when fluid temperature drops to −10°C (14°F).
This pressure rise is adopted to prevent a delay in clutch and
brake operation due to extreme drop of fluid viscosity at low
temperature.

SAT007J

SHIFT CONTROL NEAT0180S02


The shift is regulated entirely by electronic control to accommodate
vehicle speed and varying engine operations. This is accomplished
by electrical signals transmitted by the revolution sensor and
throttle position sensor. This results in improved acceleration per-
formance and fuel economy.

Control of Shift Solenoid Valves A and B NEAT0180S0201


The TCM activates shift solenoid valves A and B according to sig-
nals from the throttle position sensor and revolution sensor to
select the optimum gear position on the basis of the shift schedule
memorized in the TCM.
The shift solenoid valve performs simple ON-OFF operation. When
set to ON, the drain circuit closes and pilot pressure is applied to
the shift valve.
[Relation between shift solenoid valves A and B and gear positions]

SAT008J

Gear position
Shift solenoid valve
D1, 21, 11 D2, 22, 12 D3 D4 (OD) N-P

A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) ON (Closed)

B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)

Control of Shift Valves A and B NEAT0180S0202

SAT047J

AT-28
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Pilot pressure generated by the operation of shift solenoid valves
A and B is applied to the end face of shift valves A and B. GI
The drawing above shows the operation of shift valve B. When the
shift solenoid valve is “ON”, pilot pressure applied to the end face
of the shift valve overcomes spring force, moving the valve upward. MA
LOCK-UP CONTROL NEAT0180S03
The torque converter clutch piston in the torque converter is locked EM
to eliminate torque converter slip to increase power transmission
efficiency. The solenoid valve is controlled by an ON-OFF duty
signal sent from the TCM. The signal is converted to oil pressure LC
signal which controls the torque converter clutch piston.
Conditions for Lock-up Operation
When vehicle is driven in 4th gear position, vehicle speed and
NEAT0180S0301
EC
throttle opening are detected. If the detected values fall within the
lock-up zone memorized in the TCM, lock-up is performed.
FE
Overdrive control switch ON OFF

Selector lever “D” position


CL
Gear position D4 D3

Vehicle speed sensor More than set value


MT
Throttle position sensor Less than set opening

Closed throttle position switch OFF


AT
A/T fluid temperature sensor More than 40°C (104°F)

TF

PD

FA

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve Control


The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is controlled by the
NEAT0180S0302
RA
TCM. The plunger closes the drain circuit during the OFF period,
and opens the circuit during the ON period. If the percentage of
OFF-time increases in one cycle, the pilot pressure drain time is
BR
reduced and pilot pressure remains high.
The torque converter clutch piston is designed to slip to adjust the
ratio of ON-OFF, thereby reducing lock-up shock. ST

RS
SAT010J

OFF-time INCREASING
" BT
Amount of drain DECREASING
"
Pilot pressure HIGH HA
"
Lock-up RELEASING
EL

IDX
SAT011J

AT-29
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Torque Converter Clutch Control Valve OperationNEAT0180S0303

SAT048J

Lock-up Released
The OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is
long, and pilot pressure is high. The pilot pressure pushes the end
face of the torque converter clutch control valve in combination with
spring force to move the valve to the left. As a result, converter
pressure is applied to chamber A (torque converter clutch piston
release side). Accordingly, the torque converter clutch piston
remains unlocked.
Lock-up Applied
When the OFF-duration of the torque converter clutch solenoid
valve is short, pilot pressure drains and becomes low. Accordingly,
the control valve moves to the right by the pilot pressure of the
other circuit and converter pressure. As a result, converter pres-
sure is applied to chamber B, keeping the torque converter clutch
piston applied.
Also smooth lock-up is provided by transient application and
release of the lock-up.
OVERRUN CLUTCH CONTROL (ENGINE BRAKE
CONTROL) NEAT0180S04
Forward one-way clutch is used to reduce shifting shocks in down-
shifting operations. This clutch transmits engine torque to the
wheels. However, drive force from the wheels is not transmitted to
the engine because the one-way clutch rotates idle. This means the
engine brake is not effective.
The overrun clutch operates when the engine brake is needed.
Overrun Clutch Operating Conditions NEAT0180S0401

Gear position Throttle opening

D position D1, D2, D3 gear position


Less than 3/16
2 position 21, 22 gear position

1 position 11, 12 gear position At any position

SAT014J

AT-30
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Mechanism (Cont’d)
Overrun Clutch Solenoid Valve Control
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is operated by an ON-OFF sig-
NEAT0180S0402
GI
nal transmitted by the TCM to provide overrun clutch control
(engine brake control).
When this solenoid valve is ON, the pilot pressure drain port MA
closes. When it is OFF, the drain port opens.
During the solenoid valve ON pilot pressure is applied to the end
face of the overrun clutch control valve. EM

LC
SAT015J

Overrun Clutch Control Valve Operation


When the solenoid valve is ON, pilot pressure A is applied to the
NEAT0180S0403
EC
overrun clutch control valve. This pushes up the overrun clutch
control valve. The line pressure is then shut off so that the clutch
does not engage. FE
When the solenoid valve is OFF, pilot pressure A is not generated.
At this point, the overrun clutch control valve moves downward by
spring force. As a result, overrun clutch operation pressure is pro- CL
vided by the overrun clutch reducing valve. This causes the over-
run clutch to engage.
In the 1 position, the overrun clutch control valve remains pushed MT
down so that the overrun clutch is engaged at all times.

AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT049J

Control Valve NEAT0181 RA


FUNCTION OF CONTROL VALVE NEAT0181S01

Valve name Function


BR
I Pressure regulator valve Regulate oil discharged from the oil pump to provide optimum line pressure for all
I Pressure regulator plug driving conditions.
I Pressure regulator sleeve plug ST
Pressure modifier valve Used as a signal supplementary valve to the pressure regulator valve. Regulates
pressure-modifier pressure (signal pressure) which controls optimum line pressure for
all driving conditions. RS
Modifier accumulator piston Smooths hydraulic pressure regulated by the pressure modifier valve to prevent pul-
sations.
BT
Pilot valve Regulates line pressure to maintain a constant pilot pressure level which controls
lock-up mechanism, overrun clutch, 3-2 timing required for shifting.
HA
Accumulator control valve Regulate accumulator backpressure to pressure suited to driving conditions.
Accumulator control sleeve

Manual valve Directs line pressure to oil circuits corresponding to select positions. EL
Hydraulic pressure drains when the shift lever is in Neutral.

IDX

AT-31
OVERALL SYSTEM
Control Valve (Cont’d)

Valve name Function

Shift valve A Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve
A to meet driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th
, 3rd , 2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve B.

Shift valve B Simultaneously switches three oil circuits using output pressure of shift solenoid valve
B in relation to driving conditions (vehicle speed, throttle opening, etc.).
Provides automatic downshifting and up-shifting (1st , 2nd , 3rd , 4th gears/4th
, 3rd , 2nd , 1st gears) in combination with shift valve A.

Shuttle shift valve S Switches hydraulic circuits to provide 3-2 timing control and overrun clutch control in
relation to the throttle opening.
Inactivates the overrun clutch to prevent interlocking in 4th gear when the throttle is
wide open.

Overrun clutch control valve Switches hydraulic circuits to prevent engagement of the overrun clutch simulta-
neously with application of the brake band in 4th gear. (Interlocking occurs if the
overrun clutch engages during D4 gear operation.)

4-2 relay valve Memorizes that the transmission is in 4th gear. Prevents the transmission from down-
shifting from 4th gear to 3rd and then to 2nd in combination with 4-2 sequence valve
and shift valves A and B when downshifting from 4th to 2nd gear.

4-2 sequence valve Prevents band servo pressure from draining before high clutch operating pressure
and band servo releasing pressure drain (from the same circuit) during downshifting
from 4th to 2nd gear.

Servo charger valve An accumulator and a one-way orifice are used in the 2nd gear band servo oil circuit
to dampen shifting shock when shifting from 1st to 2nd gear.
To maintain adequate flowrate when downshifting from 4th or 3rd gear to 2nd gear,
the servo charger valve directs 2nd gear band servo hydraulic pressure to the circuit
without going through the one-way orifice when downshifting from 3rd or a higher
gear.

3-2 timing valve Prevents a late operation of the brake band when shifting selector lever from D to 1
or 2 position while driving in D3.

1 reducing valve Reduces low & reverse brake pressure to dampen engine-brake shock when down-
shifting from the 1 position 2nd gear to 1st gear.

Overrun clutch reducing valve Reduces oil pressure directed to the overrun clutch and prevents engine-brake shock.
In 1 and 2 positions, line pressure acts on the overrun clutch reducing valve to
increase the pressure-regulating point, with resultant engine brake capability.

Torque converter relief valve Prevents an excessive rise in torque converter pressure.

Torque converter clutch control valve, Activate or inactivate the lock-up function.
torque converter clutch control plug and Also provide smooth lock-up through transient application and release of the lock-up
torque converter clutch control sleeve system.

Shuttle shift valve D Switches hydraulic circuits so that output pressure of the torque converter clutch sole-
noid valve acts on the lock-up valve in the D position of 2nd, 3rd and 4th gears. (In
the D position 1st gear, lock-up is inhibited.)
I Lock-up control is not affected in D position 2nd, 3rd or 4th gears, unless output
pressure of the torque converter clutch solenoid valve is generated by a signal
from the control unit.

AT-32
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Introduction

Introduction NEAT0014 GI
The A/T system has two self-diagnostic systems.
The first is the emission-related on board diagnostic system (OBD-II) performed by the TCM in combination
with the ECM. The malfunction is indicated by the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) and is stored as a DTC in
the ECM memory but not the TCM memory. MA
The second is the TCM original self-diagnosis indicated by the O/D OFF indicator lamp. The malfunction is
stored in the TCM memory. The detected items are overlapped with OBD-II self-diagnostic items. For detail,
refer to AT-46. EM
OBD-II Function for A/T System NEAT0182
The ECM provides emission-related on board diagnostic (OBD-II) functions for the A/T system. One function LC
is to receive a signal from the TCM used with OBD-related parts of the A/T system. The signal is sent to the
ECM when a malfunction occurs in the corresponding OBD-related part. The other function is to indicate a
diagnostic result by means of the MIL (malfunction indicator lamp) on the instrument panel. Sensors, switches EC
and solenoid valves are used as sensing elements.
The MIL automatically illuminates in One or Two Trip Detection Logic when a malfunction is sensed in rela-
tion to A/T system parts. FE
One or Two Trip Detection Logic of OBD-II NEAT0015
ONE TRIP DETECTION LOGIC CL
NEAT0015S01
If a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, the MIL will illuminate and the malfunction will be stored
in the ECM memory as a DTC. The TCM is not provided with such a memory function.
MT
TWO TRIP DETECTION LOGIC NEAT0015S02
When a malfunction is sensed during the first test drive, it is stored in the ECM memory as a 1st trip DTC
(diagnostic trouble code) or 1st trip freeze frame data. At this point, the MIL will not illuminate. — First Trip AT
If the same malfunction as that experienced during the first test drive is sensed during the second test drive,
the MIL will illuminate. — Second Trip
A/T-related parts for which the MIL illuminates during the first or second test drive are listed below. TF
MIL
Items
One trip detection Two trip detection PD
Shift solenoid valve A — DTC: P0750 (1108) X

Shift solenoid valve B — DTC: P0755 (1201) X FA


Throttle position sensor or switch — DTC: P1705 (1206) X

Except above X RA

The “trip” in the “One or Two Trip Detection Logic” means a driving mode in which self-diagnosis is performed
during vehicle operation. BR
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) NEAT0016
HOW TO READ DTC AND 1ST TRIP DTC ST
NEAT0016S01
DTC and 1st trip DTC can be read by the following methods.
1. ( No Tools) The number of blinks of the malfunction indicator lamp in the Diagnostic Test Mode II
(Self-Diagnostic Results) Examples: 1101, 1102, 1103, 1104, etc. For details, refer to EC section [“Mal-
RS
function Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
These DTCs are controlled by NISSAN.
BT
2. ( with CONSULT or GST) CONSULT or GST (Generic Scan Tool) Examples: P0705, P0710, P0720,
P0725, etc.
These DTCs are prescribed by SAE J2012. HA
(CONSULT also displays the malfunctioning component or system.)
I 1st trip DTC No. is the same as DTC No.
I Output of the diagnostic trouble code indicates that the indicated circuit has a malfunction. EL
However, in case of the Mode II and GST they do not indicate whether the malfunction is still
occurring or occurred in the past and returned to normal.
CONSULT can identify them as shown below. Therefore, using CONSULT (if available) is recom- IDX
mended.

AT-33
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)
A sample of CONSULT display for DTC is shown at left. DTC or 1st trip DTC of a malfunction is displayed in
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT. Time data indicates how many times the
vehicle was driven after the last detection of a DTC.

SEF895K

If the DTC is being detected currently, the time data will be “0”.

SAT365J

If a 1st trip DTC is stored in the ECM, the time data will be “[1t]”.

SAT364J

Freeze Frame Data and 1st Trip Freeze Frame Data NEAT0016S0101
The ECM has a memory function, which stores the driving condition such as fuel system status, calculated
load value, engine coolant temperature, short term fuel trim, long term fuel trim, engine speed and vehicle
speed at the moment the ECM detects a malfunction.
Data which are stored in the ECM memory, along with the 1st trip DTC, are called 1st trip freeze frame data,
and the data, stored together with the DTC data, are called freeze frame data and displayed on CONSULT or
GST. The 1st trip freeze frame data can only be displayed on the CONSULT screen, not on the GST. For detail,
refer to EC section (“CONSULT”, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”).
Only one set of freeze frame data (either 1st trip freeze frame data of freeze frame data) can be stored in the
ECM. 1st trip freeze frame data is stored in the ECM memory along with the 1st trip DTC. There is no prior-
ity for 1st trip freeze frame data and it is updated each time a different 1st trip DTC is detected. However, once
freeze frame data (2nd trip detection/MIL on) is stored in the ECM memory, 1st trip freeze frame data is no
longer stored. Remember, only one set of freeze frame data can be stored in the ECM. The ECM has the fol-
lowing priorities to update the data.

AT-34
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)

Priority Items GI
1 Freeze frame data Misfire — DTC: P0300 - P0306 (0701, 0603 - 0608)
Fuel Injection System Function — DTC: P0171 (0115), P0172 (0114), P0174 (0209), P0175
(0210) MA
2 Except the above items (Includes A/T related items)

3 1st trip freeze frame data EM


Both 1st trip freeze frame data and freeze frame data (along with the DTCs) are cleared when the ECM
memory is erased. LC
HOW TO ERASE DTC NEAT0016S02
The diagnostic trouble code can be erased by CONSULT, GST or ECM DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE as EC
described following.
I If the battery terminal is disconnected, the diagnostic trouble code will be lost within 24 hours.
I When you erase the DTC, using CONSULT or GST is easier and quicker than switching the mode FE
selector on the ECM.
The following emission-related diagnostic information is cleared from the ECM memory when erasing DTC
related to OBD-II. For details, refer to EC section (“Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, “ON BOARD CL
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”).
I Diagnostic trouble codes (DTC)
I 1st trip diagnostic trouble codes (1st trip DTC) MT
I Freeze frame data
I 1st trip freeze frame data AT
I System readiness test (SRT) codes
I Test values
TF
HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH CONSULT) NEAT0016S03
I If a DTC is displayed for both ECM and TCM, it needs to be erased for both ECM and TCM.
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 5 PD
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Turn CONSULT ON and touch “A/T”.
3. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. FA
4. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the TCM will be erased.) Then touch “BACK” twice.
5. Touch “ENGINE”. RA
6. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.
7. Touch “ERASE”. (The DTC in the ECM will be erased.)
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-35
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
OBD-II Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) (Cont’d)

SAT382J

HOW TO ERASE DTC (WITH GST) NEAT0016S04


1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 5
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-46. (The engine warm-up
step can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Select Mode 4 with Generic Scan Tool (GST). For details, refer to EC section [“Generic Scan Tool (GST)”,
“ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
HOW TO ERASE DTC (NO TOOLS) NEAT0016S05
1. If the ignition switch stays ON after repair work, be sure to turn ignition switch OFF once. Wait at least 5
seconds and then turn it ON (engine stopped) again.
2. Perform “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools)”. Refer to AT-46. (The engine warm-up step
can be skipped when performing the diagnosis only to erase the DTC.)
3. Change the diagnostic test mode from Mode II to Mode I by turning the mode selector on the ECM.
Refer to EC section [“HOW TO SWITCH DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODES”, “Malfunction Indicator Lamp
(MIL)”, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-36
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)

Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) NEAT0183


GI
1. The malfunction indicator lamp will light up when the ignition
switch is turned ON without the engine running. This is for
checking the blown lamp.
MA
I If the malfunction indicator lamp does not light up, refer to EL
section (“System Description”, “WARNING LAMPS”).
(Or see MIL & Data Link Connectors in EC section.)
EM
2. When the engine is started, the malfunction indicator lamp
should go off.
If the lamp remains on, the on board diagnostic system has LC
SAT964I detected an emission-related (OBD-II) malfunction. For detail,
refer to EC section (“ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION”). EC

FE

CL

MT

CONSULT NEAT0184 AT
After performing “SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CON-
SULT)” (AT-38), place check marks for results on the “Diagnostic
Worksheet”, AT-55. Reference pages are provided following the TF
items.
NOTICE:
1) The CONSULT electrically displays shift timing and lock-up PD
timing (that is, operation timing of each solenoid).
Check for time difference between actual shift timing and the
CONSULT display. If the difference is noticeable, mechanical FA
parts (except solenoids, sensors, etc.) may be malfunctioning.
Check mechanical parts using applicable diagnostic proce-
dures. RA
2) Shift schedule (which implies gear position) displayed on
CONSULT and that indicated in Service Manual may differ
slightly. This occurs because of the following reasons: BR
I Actual shift schedule has more or less tolerance or allowance,
I Shift schedule indicated in Service Manual refers to the point
where shifts start, and ST
I Gear position displayed on CONSULT indicates the point
where shifts are completed.
3) Shift solenoid valve “A” or “B” is displayed on CONSULT at the RS
start of shifting. Gear position is displayed upon completion of
shifting (which is computed by TCM).
BT
4) Additional CONSULT information can be found in the Opera-
tion Manual supplied with the CONSULT unit.
HA

EL

IDX

AT-37
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH CONSULT)
NEAT0184S01
1. Turn on CONSULT and touch “ENGINE” for OBD-II detected
items or touch “A/T” for TCM self-diagnosis.
If A/T is not displayed, check TCM power supply and ground
circuit. Refer to AT-92. If result is NG, refer to EL section
(“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”).

SAT038J

2. Touch “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”.


Display shows malfunction experienced since the last erasing
operation.
CONSULT performs REAL-TIME SELF-DIAGNOSIS.
Also, any malfunction detected while in this mode will be dis-
played at real time.

SAT416J

SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULT TEST MODE NEAT0184S02

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)


Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode)
Malfunction is detected when ... Available by
Available by
malfunction
O/D OFF
indicator lamp*2,
“A/T” “ENGINE” indicator lamp or
“ENGINE” on CON-
“A/T” on CONSULT
SULT or GST

Park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit I TCM does not receive the correct
voltage signal (based on the gear — P0705
— PNP SW/CIRC position) from the switch.

Revolution sensor I TCM does not receive the proper


voltage signal from the sensor. X P0720
VHCL SPEED VEH SPD SEN/CIR
SEN·A/T AT

Vehicle speed sensor (Meter) I TCM does not receive the proper
voltage signal from the sensor. X —
VHCL SPEED

SEN·MTR

A/T 1st gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st


gear position even if electrical — P0731*1
— A/T 1ST GR FNCTN circuit is good.

A/T 2nd gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd


gear position even if electrical — P0732*1
— A/T 2ND GR FNCTN circuit is good.

A/T 3rd gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd


gear position even if electrical — P0733*1
— A/T 3RD GR FNCTN circuit is good.

A/T 4th gear function I A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th


gear position even if electrical — P0734*1
— A/T 4TH GR FNCTN circuit is good.

AT-38
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC) GI


Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode)
Malfunction is detected when ... Available by MA
Available by
malfunction
O/D OFF
indicator lamp*2,
indicator lamp or
“A/T” “ENGINE”
“A/T” on CONSULT
“ENGINE” on CON- EM
SULT or GST

A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) I A/T cannot perform lock-up even
if electrical circuit is good. — P0744*1 LC
— A/T TCC S/V FNCTN

Shift solenoid valve A I TCM detects an improper voltage


drop when it tries to operate the EC
SHIFT SOLENOID/V SFT SOL A/CIRC X P0750
solenoid valve.
A

Shift solenoid valve B I TCM detects an improper voltage


FE
drop when it tries to operate the X P0755
SHIFT SOLENOID/V SFT SOL B/CIRC solenoid valve.
B CL
Overrun clutch solenoid valve I TCM detects an improper voltage
drop when it tries to operate the X P1760
OVERRUN CLUTCH O/R CLUCH SOL/ solenoid valve. MT
S/V CIRC

T/C clutch solenoid valve I TCM detects an improper voltage


drop when it tries to operate the X P0740
AT
T/C CLUTCH SOL/V TCC SOLENOID/ solenoid valve.
CIRC

Line pressure solenoid valve I TCM detects an improper voltage TF


drop when it tries to operate the X P0745
LINE PRESSURE L/PRESS SOL/CIRC solenoid valve.
S/V PD
Throttle position sensor I TCM receives an excessively low
Throttle position switch or high voltage from the sensor.
X P1705 FA
THROTTLE POSI TP SEN/CIRC A/T
SEN

Engine speed signal I TCM does not receive the proper RA


voltage signal from the ECM. X P0725
ENGINE SPEED SIG

A/T fluid temperature sensor I TCM receives an excessively low BR


or high voltage from the sensor. X P0710
BATT/FLUID TEMP ATF TEMP SEN/
SEN CIRC
ST
TCM (RAM) I TCM memory (RAM) is malfunc-
tioning. — —
CONTROL UNIT
(RAM)
— RS
TCM (ROM) I TCM memory (ROM) is malfunc-

CONTROL UNIT
tioning. — — BT

(ROM)

Initial start I This is not a malfunction mes- HA


sage (Whenever shutting off a
power supply to the control unit, X —
INITIAL START this message appears on the

screen.)
EL

IDX

AT-39
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)

TCM self-diagnosis OBD-II (DTC)


Detected items
(Screen terms for CONSULT, “SELF-DIAG
RESULTS” test mode)
Malfunction is detected when ... Available by
Available by
malfunction
O/D OFF
indicator lamp*2,
“A/T” “ENGINE” indicator lamp or
“ENGINE” on CON-
“A/T” on CONSULT
SULT or GST

No failure I No failure has been detected.


(NO SELF DIAGNOSTIC FAILURE INDI-
X X
CATED FURTHER TESTING MAY BE
REQUIRED**)

X: Applicable
—: Not applicable
*1: These malfunctions cannot be displayed by MIL if another malfunction is assigned to MIL.
*2: Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

DATA MONITOR MODE (A/T) NEAT0184S03

Monitor item

Item Display ECU Description Remarks


Main sig-
input sig-
nals
nals

Vehicle speed sensor 1 VHCL/S SE·A/T I Vehicle speed computed When racing engine in “N”
(A/T) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of revolution or “P” position with vehicle
(Revolution sensor) X — sensor is displayed. stationary, CONSULT data
may not indicate 0 km/h (0
mph).

Vehicle speed sensor 2 VHCL/S SE·MTR I Vehicle speed computed Vehicle speed display may
(Meter) [km/h] or [mph] from signal of vehicle not be accurate under
speed sensor is dis- approx. 10 km/h (6 mph). It
X —
played. may not indicate 0 km/h (0
mph) when vehicle is sta-
tionary.

Throttle position sensor THRTL POS SEN I Throttle position sensor


[V] X — signal voltage is dis-
played.

A/T fluid temperature sen- FLUID TEMP SE I A/T fluid temperature


sor [V] sensor signal voltage is
X — displayed.
I Signal voltage lowers as
fluid temperature rises.

Battery voltage BATTERY VOLT I Source voltage of TCM is


X —
[V] displayed.

Engine speed ENGINE SPEED I Engine speed, computed Engine speed display may
[rpm] from engine speed not be accurate under
X X signal, is displayed. approx. 800 rpm. It may not
indicate 0 rpm even when
engine is not running.

Overdrive control switch OVERDRIVE SW I ON/OFF state computed


[ON/OFF] X — from signal of overdrive
control SW is displayed.

P/N position switch P/N POSI SW I ON/OFF state computed


[ON/OFF] X — from signal of P/N posi-
tion SW is displayed.

AT-40
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)

Monitor item GI
Item Display ECU Description Remarks
Main sig-
input sig-
nals
nals MA
R position switch R POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed
[ON/OFF] X — from signal of R position
SW is displayed. EM
D position switch D POSITION SW I ON/OFF state computed
[ON/OFF] X — from signal of D position LC
SW is displayed.

2 position switch 2 POSITION SW I ON/OFF status, com-


[ON/OFF]
X —
puted from signal of 2 EC
position SW, is dis-
played.

1 position switch 1 POSITION SW I ON/OFF status, com- FE


[ON/OFF] puted from signal of 1
X —
position SW, is dis-
played. CL
ASCD cruise signal ASCD·CRUISE I Status of ASCD cruise I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] signal is displayed. when no ASCD is
X — ON ... Cruising state mounted. MT
OFF ... Normal running
state
AT
ASCD OD cut signal ASCD OD CUT I Status of ASCD OD I This is displayed even
[ON/OFF] release signal is dis- when no ASCD is
X — played. mounted.
ON ... OD released TF
OFF ... OD not released

Kickdown switch KICKDOWN SW I ON/OFF status, com- I This is displayed even PD


[ON/OFF] X — puted from signal of kick- when no kickdown switch
down SW, is displayed. is equipped.

Closed throttle position CLOSED I ON/OFF status, com- FA


switch THL/SW puted from signal of
X —
[ON/OFF] closed throttle position
SW, is displayed. RA
Wide open throttle position W/O THRL/P-SW I ON/OFF status, com-
switch [ON/OFF] puted from signal of wide
X — BR
open throttle position
SW, is displayed.

Gear position GEAR I Gear position data used


— X for computation by TCM,
ST
is displayed.

Selector lever position SLCT LVR POSI I Selector lever position I A specific value used for RS
data, used for computa- control is displayed if fail-
— X
tion by TCM, is dis- safe is activated due to
played. error.
BT
Vehicle speed VEHICLE SPEED I Vehicle speed data, used
[km/h] or [mph] — X for computation by TCM,
is displayed. HA
Throttle position THROTTLE POSI I Throttle position data, I A specific value used for
[/8] used for computation by control is displayed if fail-
— X EL
TCM, is displayed. safe is activated due to
error.

IDX

AT-41
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)

Monitor item

Item Display ECU Description Remarks


Main sig-
input sig-
nals
nals

Line pressure duty LINE PRES DTY I Control value of line


[%] pressure solenoid valve,
— X computed by TCM from
each input signal, is dis-
played.

Torque converter clutch TCC S/V DUTY I Control value of torque


solenoid valve duty [%] converter clutch solenoid
— X valve, computed by TCM
from each input signal, is
displayed.

Shift solenoid valve A SHIFT S/V A I Control value of shift Control value of solenoid is
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve A, com- displayed even if solenoid
— X
puted by TCM from each circuit is disconnected.
input signal, is displayed. The “OFF” signal is dis-
played if solenoid circuit is
Shift solenoid valve B SHIFT S/V B I Control value of shift shorted.
[ON/OFF] solenoid valve B, com-
— X
puted by TCM from each
input signal, is displayed.

Overrun clutch solenoid OVERRUN/C S/V I Control value of overrun


valve [ON/OFF] clutch solenoid valve
— X computed by TCM from
each input signal is dis-
played.

Self-diagnosis display lamp SELF-D DP LMP I Control status of O/D


(O/D OFF indicator lamp) [ON/OFF] — X OFF indicator lamp is
displayed.

X: Applicable
—: Not applicable

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE WITH CONSULT NEAT0184S04


CONSULT Setting Procedure NEAT0184S0401
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect CONSULT to Data link connector for CONSULT. Data
link connector for CONSULT is located in instrument lower
panel on driver side.

SEF321V

3. Turn ignition switch ON


4. Touch “START”.

SEF392I

AT-42
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
5. Touch “A/T”.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT974H

6. Touch “DTC WORK SUPPORT”.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT384J

7. Touch select item menu (1ST, 2ND, etc.).


AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT975I

8. Touch “START”.
RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT976I

9. Perform driving test according to “DTC CONFIRMATION PRO-


CEDURE” in “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT977I

AT-43
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
I When testing conditions are satisfied, CONSULT screen
changes from “OUT OF CONDITION” to “TESTING”.

SAT978I

10. Stop vehicle. If “NG” appears on the screen, malfunction may


exist. Go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.

SAT979I

SAT980I

11. Perform test drive to check gear shift feeling in accordance


with instructions displayed.

SAT981I

12. Touch “YES” or “NO”.

SAT982I

AT-44
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
CONSULT (Cont’d)
13. CONSULT procedure ended.
If “NG” appears on the screen, a malfunction may exist. Go to GI
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.

MA

EM

LC
SAT983I

EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT980I

DTC WORK SUPPORT MODE NEAT0184S05


AT
DTC work support item Description Check item

Following items for “A/T 1st gear function (P0731)” can be con-
firmed.
I Shift solenoid valve A TF
I Shift solenoid valve B
1ST GR FNCTN P0731 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con-
I Each clutch
ducted or not)
I Hydraulic control circuit PD
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

Following items for “A/T 2nd gear function (P0732)” can be con-
firmed. I Shift solenoid valve B
2ND GR FNCTN P0732 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con- I Each clutch
FA
ducted or not) I Hydraulic control circuit
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
RA
Following items for “A/T 3rd gear function (P0733)” can be con-
firmed. I Shift solenoid valve A
3RD GR FNCTN P0733 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con- I Each clutch
ducted or not) I Hydraulic control circuit
BR
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

I Shift solenoid valve A ST


Following items for “A/T 4th gear function (P0734)” can be con-
I Shift solenoid valve B
firmed.
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
4TH GR FNCTN P0734 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con-
I Line pressure solenoid valve
ducted or not) RS
I Each clutch
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)
I Hydraulic control circuit

Following items for “A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up) (P0744)”


I Torque converter clutch sole-
BT
can be confirmed.
noid valve
TCC S/V FNCTN P0744 I Self-diagnosis status (whether the diagnosis is being con-
I Each clutch
ducted or not) HA
I Hydraulic control circuit
I Self-diagnosis result (OK or NG)

EL

IDX

AT-45
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT

Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT NEAT0207


OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (WITH NEAT0207S01
GST)
Refer to EC section [“Generic Scan Tool (GST)”, “ON BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
OBD-II SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS) NEAT0207S02
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)


NEAT0207S03
Preparation NEAT0207S0301
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Connector the handy type vacuum pump to the throttle opener
and apply vacuum –25.3 kPa (–190 mmHg, –7.48 inHg).
3. Disconnect the throttle position switch harness connector.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.

SEF793W

5. Check continuity of the closed throttle position switch.


Continuity should exist.
(If continuity does not exist, check throttle opener and
closed throttle position switch. Then increase vacuum
until closed throttle position switch shows continuity.)
6. Go to “TCM Self-diagnostic Procedure”, AT-47.

AAT498A

AT-46
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

1 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP GI


1. Selector lever in P position. Start the engine. Warm engine to normal operating temperature.
2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
3. Wait at least 5 seconds. MA

EM

LC

EC

SAT967I
FE
4. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?
CL

MT

AT

TF
AAT472A

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
PD
No © Go to “1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-212.
FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-47
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

2 JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 1


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Turn ignition switch to ACC position.
3. Move selector lever from P to D position.
4. Turn ignition switch to ON position. Do not start engine.
5. Depress and hold overdrive control switch in OFF position (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON) until directed to
release the switch (If O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on, go to step 3 on AT-49).
6. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.

SAT968I
7. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Do not start engine).
8. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be OFF).
I Wait for more than 2 seconds after ignition switch ON.
9. Move selector lever to 2 position.
10. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON).
11. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be OFF) until directed to release the
switch.

SAT969I

© GO TO 3.

AT-48
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

3 JUDGEMENT PROCEDURE STEP 2 GI


1. Move selector lever to 1 position.
2. Release the overdrive control switch.
3. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON). MA
4. Depress and release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be OFF).
5. Depress and hold the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will be ON) until directed to release the
switch. EM

LC

EC

FE

SAT970I
6. Depress accelerator pedal fully and release.
CL
7. Release the overdrive control switch (the O/D OFF indicator lamp will begin to flash ON and OFF).

MT

AT

TF

PD
SAT981F

© GO TO 4. FA

4 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE RA


Check O/D OFF indicator lamp.
Refer to JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE, AT-50.
BR

ST

RS

AAT472A
BT
© DIAGNOSIS END
HA

EL

IDX

AT-49
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)
JUDGEMENT OF SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE NEAT0207S04

O/D OFF indicator lamp:

All judgement flickers are same. 1st judgement flicker is longer than others.

SAT437F
SAT436F Revolution sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
All circuits that can be confirmed by self-diagnosis are OK. ⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SEN-
SOR) (DTC: 1102), AT-111.

2nd judgement flicker is longer than others. 3rd judgement flicker is longer than others.

SAT439F SAT441F
Vehicle speed sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected. Throttle position sensor circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR, AT-201. ⇒ Go to THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR (DTC: 1206),
AT-181.

4th judgement flicker is longer than others. 5th judgement flicker is longer than others.

SAT445F
Shift solenoid valve B circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
SAT443F ⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B (DTC: 1201), AT-176.
Shift solenoid valve A circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
⇒ Go to SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A (DTC: 1108), AT-171.

AT-50
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

O/D OFF indicator lamp: GI


6th judgement flicker is longer than others. 7th judgement flicker is longer than others.

MA

EM

LC

SAT447F SAT449F
Overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- Torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited EC
nected. or disconnected.
⇒ Go to OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE (DTC: ⇒ Go to TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
1203), AT-190. (DTC: 1204), AT-150. FE
8th judgement flicker is longer than others. 9th judgement flicker is longer than others.

CL

MT

AT

SAT453F
TF
Engine speed signal circuit is short-circuited or disconnected.
SAT451F
⇒ Go to ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL (DTC: 1207), AT-116.
A/T fluid temperature sensor is disconnected or TCM power
source circuit is damaged. PD
⇒ Go to A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR AND TCM
POWER SOURCE, AT-195.

10th judgement flicker is longer than others. Flickers as shown below. FA

RA

BR

ST
SAT457F
SAT455F Battery power is low.
Line pressure solenoid valve circuit is short-circuited or discon- Battery has been disconnected for a long time. RS
nected. Battery is connected conversely.
⇒ Go to LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE (DTC: 1205), (When reconnecting TCM connectors. — This is not a problem.)
AT-165. BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-51
ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Diagnostic Procedure Without CONSULT (Cont’d)

O/D OFF indicator lamp:

Lamp comes on.

SAT367J
Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, overdrive control switch or
throttle position switch circuit is disconnected or TCM is dam-
aged.
⇒ Go to 21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PARK/
NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP), OVERDRIVE CONTROL AND
THROTTLE POSITION SWITCHES), AT-249.

t1 = 2.5 seconds t2 = 2.0 seconds t3 = 1.0 second t4 = 1.0 second

AT-52
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION

Introduction NEAT0019
GI
The TCM receives a signal from the vehicle speed sensor, throttle
position sensor or park/neutral position (PNP) switch and provides
shift control or lock-up control via A/T solenoid valves.
The TCM also communicates with the ECM by means of a signal MA
sent from sensing elements used with the OBD-related parts of the
A/T system for malfunction-diagnostic purposes. The TCM is
capable of diagnosing malfunctioning parts while the ECM can EM
store malfunctions in its memory.
Input and output signals must always be correct and stable in the
operation of the A/T system. The A/T system must be in good LC
AAT473A
operating condition and be free of valve seizure, solenoid valve
malfunction, etc.
It is much more difficult to diagnose a problem that occurs intermit- EC
tently rather than continuously. Most intermittent problems are
caused by poor electric connections or improper wiring. In this
case, careful checking of suspected circuits may help prevent the FE
replacement of good parts.
A visual check only may not find the cause of the problems. A road
test with CONSULT (or GST) or a circuit tester connected should CL
be performed. Follow the “Work Flow”. Refer to AT-57.
Before undertaking actual checks, take a few minutes to talk with
a customer who approaches with a driveability complaint. The cus- MT
SAT632I
tomer can supply good information about such problems, espe-
cially intermittent ones. Find out what symptoms are present and
under what conditions they occur. A “Diagnostic Worksheet” like the AT
example (AT-55) should be used.
Start your diagnosis by looking for “conventional” problems first.
This will help troubleshoot driveability problems on an electronically TF
controlled engine vehicle.
Also check related Service bulletins.
PD

FA
SEF234G

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-53
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC WORKSHEET =NEAT0019S01
Information From Customer NEAT0019S0101
KEY POINTS
WHAT ..... Vehicle & A/T model
WHEN..... Date, Frequencies
WHERE..... Road conditions
HOW..... Operating conditions, Symptoms
Customer name MR/MS Model & Year VIN

Trans. model Engine Mileage

Incident Date Manuf. Date In Service Date

Frequency l Continuous l Intermittent ( times a day)

Symptoms l Vehicle does not move. (l Any position l Particular position)

l No up-shift (l 1st , 2nd l 2nd , 3rd l 3rd , O/D)

l No down-shift (l O/D , 3rd l 3rd , 2nd l 2nd , 1st)

l Lockup malfunction

l Shift point too high or too low.

l Shift shock or slip (l N , D l Lockup l Any drive position)

l Noise or vibration

l No kickdown

l No pattern select

l Others
( )

O/D OFF indicator lamp Blinks for about 8 seconds.

l Continuously lit l Not lit

Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) l Continuously lit l Not lit

AT-54
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)
Diagnostic Worksheet =NEAT0019S0102
GI
1. l Read the Fail-safe Remarks and listen to customer complaints. AT-8

2. l CHECK A/T FLUID AT-59


MA
l Leakage (Follow specified procedure)
l Fluid condition
l Fluid level EM
3. Perform STALL TEST and LINE PRESSURE TEST. AT-59, AT-62

l Stall test — Mark possible damaged components/others. LC


l Torque converter one-way clutch l Low & reverse brake
l Reverse clutch l Low one-way clutch
l Forward clutch l Engine EC
l Overrun clutch l Line pressure is low
l Forward one-way clutch l Clutches and brakes except high clutch
and brake band are OK FE
l Line pressure test — Suspected parts:

4. l Perform all ROAD TEST and mark required procedures. AT-63 CL


4-1. Check before engine is started. AT-64

l SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE - Mark detected items. MT


l Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, AT-99.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-105.
l Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-111. AT
l Engine speed signal, AT-116.
l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-150.
l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-165. TF
l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-171.
l Shift solenoid valve B, AT-176.
l Throttle position sensor, AT-181.
PD
l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-190.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-195.
l PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-249.
l Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-201. FA
l Battery
l Others
RA
4-2. Check at idle AT-66

l 1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On, AT-212.


l 2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P And N Position, AT-214. BR
l 3. In P Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed, AT-215.
l 4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves, AT-216.
l 5. Large Shock. N , R Position, AT-218. ST
l 6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position, AT-220.
l 7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position, AT-223.

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-55
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Introduction (Cont’d)

4. 4-3. Cruise test AT-67


AT-71
Part-1

l 8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1, AT-226.


l 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1, D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4, D2, AT-229.
l 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2,D3, AT-232.
l 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3,D4, AT-235.
l 12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up, AT-238.
l 13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition, AT-240.
l 14. Lock-up Is Not Released, AT-242.
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4, D3), AT-243.

Part-2 AT-75

l 9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1, D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4, D2, AT-229.
l 10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2,D3, AT-232.
l 11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3,D4, AT-235.
l 16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1, AT-245.

Part-3 AT-77

l 17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4,D3 When Overdrive Control Switch ON , OFF, AT-246
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In D3), AT-243.
l 18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3,22, When Selector Lever D , 2 Position, AT-247.
l 15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Engine Brake In 22), AT-243.
l 19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22,11, When Selector Lever 2 , 1 Position, AT-248.
l 20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake, AT-249.
l SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE — Mark detected items.

l Park/neutral position (PNP) switch, AT-99.


l A/T fluid temperature sensor, AT-105.
l Vehicle speed sensor·A/T (Revolution sensor), AT-111.
l Engine speed signal, AT-116.
l Torque converter clutch solenoid valve, AT-150.
l Line pressure solenoid valve, AT-165.
l Shift solenoid valve A, AT-171.
l Shift solenoid valve B, AT-176.
l Throttle position sensor, AT-181.
l Overrun clutch solenoid valve, AT-190.
l A/T fluid temperature sensor and TCM power source, AT-195.
l PNP, overdrive control and throttle position switches, AT-249.
l Vehicle speed sensor·MTR, AT-201.
l Battery
l Others

5. l For self-diagnosis NG items, inspect each component. Repair or replace the damaged parts. AT-38

6. l Perform all ROAD TEST and re-mark required procedures. AT-63

7. l Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE for following MIL indicating items and check out NG items. EC section
Refer to EC section [“Emission-related Diagnostic Information”, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
DESCRIPTION”].

l DTC (P0731, 1103) A/T 1st gear function, AT-121.


l DTC (P0732, 1104) A/T 2nd gear function, AT-127.
l DTC (P0733, 1105) A/T 3rd gear function, AT-133.
l DTC (P0734, 1106) A/T 4th gear function, AT-139.
l DTC (P0744, 1107) A/T TCC S/V function (lock-up), AT-155.

8. l Perform the Diagnostic Procedures for all remaining items marked NG. Repair or replace the damaged AT-92
parts. AT-81
Refer to the Symptom Chart when you perform the procedures. (The chart also shows some other possible
symptoms and the component inspection orders.)

9. l Erase DTC from TCM and ECM memories. AT-35

AT-56
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow

Work Flow NEAT0020 GI


HOW TO PERFORM TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR QUICK AND ACCURATE REPAIR NEAT0020S01
A good understanding of the malfunction conditions can make troubleshooting faster and more accurate.
In general, each customer feels differently about a problem. It is important to fully understand the symptoms MA
or conditions for a customer complaint.
Make good use of the two sheets provided, “INFORMATION FROM CUSTOMER” (AT-54) and “DIAGNOS-
TIC WORKSHEET” (AT-55), to perform the best troubleshooting possible. EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-57
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — INTRODUCTION
Work Flow (Cont’d)
WORK FLOW CHART NEAT0020S02

AAT550A

*1: AT-54 *7: AT-37 *13: AT-249


*2: AT-55 *8: AT-33 *14: AT-81
*3: AT-8 *9: AT-50 *15: AT-35
*4: AT-59 *10: AT-99 *16: AT-100
*5: AT-59, 62 *11: AT-201 *17: AT-201
*6: AT-63 *12: AT-209

AT-58
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
A/T Fluid Check

A/T Fluid Check NEAT0021 GI


FLUID LEAKAGE CHECK NEAT0021S01
1. Clean area suspected of leaking. — for example, mating sur-
face of converter housing and transmission case. MA
2. Start engine, apply foot brake, place selector lever in D posi-
tion and wait a few minutes.
3. Stop engine. EM
4. Check for fresh leakage.

LC

FLUID CONDITION CHECK NEAT0021S02


EC
Fluid color Suspected problem

Dark or black with burned odor Wear of frictional material


FE
Water contamination — Road water
Milky pink
entering through filler tube or breather

Varnished fluid, light to dark brown Oxidation — Over or under filling, —


CL
and tacky Overheating

FLUID LEVEL CHECK MT


SAT638A NEAT0021S03
Refer to MA section (“Checking A/T Fluid”, “CHASSIS AND BODY
MAINTENANCE”).
AT

TF

PD

FA

Stall Test NEAT0022 RA


STALL TEST PROCEDURE NEAT0022S01
1. Check A/T and engine fluid levels. If necessary, add.
2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF BR
reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F) ST

RS
SAT647B

3. Set parking brake and block wheels.


4. Install a tachometer where it can be seen by driver during test.
BT
I It is good practice to put a mark on point of specified
engine rpm on indicator. HA

EL

IDX
SAT513G

AT-59
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Stall Test (Cont’d)
5. Start engine, apply foot brake, and place selector lever in D
position.
6. Accelerate to wide open throttle gradually while applying foot
brake.
7. Quickly note the engine stall revolution and immediately
release throttle.
I During test, never hold throttle wide open for more than 5
seconds.
Stall revolution:
2,440 - 2,640 rpm
SAT514G

8. Move selector lever to N position.


9. Cool off ATF.
I Run engine at idle for at least one minute.
10. Repeat steps 5 through 9 with selector lever in 2, 1 and R
positions.

SAT771B

JUDGEMENT OF STALL TEST NEAT0022S02


The test result and possible damaged components relating to each
result are shown in the illustration. In order to pinpoint the possible
damaged components, follow the WORK FLOW shown in AT-57.
NOTE:
Stall revolution is too high in D or 2 position:
I Slippage occurs in 1st gear but not in 2nd and 3rd gears. .....
Low one-way clutch slippage
I Slippage occurs at the following gears:
1st through 3rd gears in D position and engine brake functions.
1st and 2nd gears in 2 position and engine brake functions with
accelerator pedal released (fully closed throttle). ..... Forward
clutch or forward one-way clutch slippage
Stall revolution is too high in R position:
I Engine brake does not function in 1 position. ..... Low & reverse
brake slippage
I Engine brake functions in 1 position. ..... Reverse clutch slip-
page
Stall revolution within specifications:
I Vehicle does not achieve speed of more than 80 km/h (50
MPH). ..... One-way clutch seizure in torque converter housing
CAUTION:
Be careful since automatic fluid temperature increases abnor-
mally.
I Slippage occurs in 3rd and 4th gears in D position. ..... High
clutch slippage
I Slippage occurs in 2nd and 4th gear in D position. ..... Brake
band slippage
Stall revolution less than specifications:
I Poor acceleration during starts. ..... One-way clutch seizure in
torque converter

AT-60
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Stall Test (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL
SAT392H

IDX

AT-61
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test

Line Pressure Test NEAT0023


LINE PRESSURE TEST PORTS NEAT0023S03
I Location of line pressure test ports.
I Always replace line pressure plugs as they are self-seal-
ing bolts.

SAT209GA

LINE PRESSURE TEST PROCEDURE NEAT0023S01


1. Check A/T and engine fluid levels. If necessary, add fluid.
2. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes or until engine oil and ATF
reach operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature:
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)

SAT647B

3. Install pressure gauge to corresponding line pressure port.

SAT518GB

SAT519GB

4. Set parking brake and block wheels.


I Continue to depress brake pedal fully while line pressure
test is being performed at stall speed.

SAT513G

AT-62
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Line Pressure Test (Cont’d)
5. Start engine and measure line pressure at idle and stall speed.
I When measuring line pressure at stall speed, follow the GI
stall test procedure.
Line pressure:
Refer to SDS, AT-344.
MA

EM

LC
SAT493G

JUDGEMENT OF LINE PRESSURE TEST NEAT0023S02


EC
Judgement Suspected parts

Line pressure is low in all posi- I Oil pump wear


tions. I Control piston damage
FE
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Spring for pressure regulator valve damaged
I Fluid pressure leakage between oil strainer and pressure regulator valve CL
I Clogged strainer

Line pressure is low in particu- I Fluid pressure leakage between manual valve and particular clutch
lar position. I For example, line pressure is:
MT
— Low in R and 1 positions, but
At idle — Normal in D and 2 positions.
Then, fluid leakage exists at or around low and reverse brake circuit. AT
Refer to “CLUTCH AND BAND CHART”, AT-17.

Line pressure is high. I Mal-adjustment of throttle position sensor


I Fluid temperature sensor damaged
TF
I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
I Pressure modifier valve sticking PD
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Open in dropping resistor circuit

Line pressure is low. I Mal-adjustment of throttle position sensor


FA
I Line pressure solenoid valve sticking
I Short circuit of line pressure solenoid valve circuit
At stall speed RA
I Pressure regulator valve or plug sticking
I Pressure modifier valve sticking
I Pilot valve sticking
BR

ST

RS

Road Test NEAT0024 BT


DESCRIPTION NEAT0024S01
I The purpose of the test is to determine overall performance of
A/T and analyze causes of problems. HA
I The road test consists of the following three parts:
a) Check before engine is started
b) Check at idle
EL
c) Cruise test
IDX
SAT786A

AT-63
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
I Before road test, familiarize yourself with all test procedures
and items to check.
I Conduct tests on all items until specified symptom is found.
Troubleshoot items which check out No Good after road test.
Refer to “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIP-
TION” and “TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS”,
AT-33 - AT-46 and AT-209 - AT-249.

SAT496G

1. CHECK BEFORE ENGINE IS STARTED NEAT0024S02

1 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP


1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
2. Move selector lever to P position.
3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
Wait at least 5 seconds.

SAT967I
4. Turn ignition switch to ON position. (Do not start engine.)
5. Does O/D OFF indicator lamp come on for about 2 seconds?

AAT472A

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to “1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On”, AT-212.

AT-64
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)

2 CHECK O/D OFF INDICATOR LAMP GI


Does O/D OFF indicator lamp flicker for about 8 seconds?

MA

EM

LC
AAT472A

Yes or No
EC
Yes © Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TCM Self- Diagnosis Procedure (No Tools), AT-46.
No © GO TO 3. FE

3 CHECK NG ITEM CL
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Perform self-diagnosis and note NG items.
Refer to TCM Self- Diagnosis Procedure (No Tools), AT-46. MT
© Go to “2. Check at idle”, AT-66.
AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-65
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
2. CHECK AT IDLE =NEAT0024S03

1 CHECK ENGINE START


1. Park vehicle on flat surface.
2. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
3. Move selector lever to P or N position.
4. Turn ignition switch to start position.
5. Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to “2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position”, AT-214.

2 CHECK ENGINE START


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Move selector lever to D, 1, 2 or R position.
3. Turn ignition switch to start position.
4. Is engine started?
Yes or No
Yes © Go to “2. Engine Cannot Be Started In “P” and “N” Position”, AT-214.
No © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Move selector lever to P position.
3. Release parking brake.
4. Push vehicle forward or backward.
5. Does vehicle move when it is pushed forward or backward?

SAT796A

Yes or No
Yes © Go to “3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed”, AT-215.
No © GO TO 4.

4 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE


1. Apply parking brake.
2. Move selector lever to N position.
3. Turn ignition switch to START position and start engine.
4. Release parking brake.
5. Does vehicle move forward or backward?
Yes or No
Yes © Go to “4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves”, AT-216.
No © GO TO 5.

AT-66
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)

5 CHECK SHIFT SHOCK GI


1. Apply foot brake.
2. Move selector lever to R position.
3. Is there large shock when changing from N to R position? MA

EM

LC

EC

SAT082J
FE
Yes or No
Yes © Go to “5. Large Shock. N , R Position”, AT-218.
CL
No © GO TO 6.

6 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE MT


1. Release foot brake for several seconds.
2. Does vehicle creep backward when foot brake is released? AT
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 7.
TF
No © Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position”, AT-220.

PD
7 CHECK VEHICLE MOVE
1. Move selector lever to D, 2 and 1 position and check if vehicle creeps forward.
2. Does vehicle creep forward in all three positions? FA
Yes or No
Yes © Go to “3. Cruise test”, AT-67. RA
No © Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position”, AT-223.

BR

ST

RS

3. CRUISE TEST NEAT0024S04 BT


I Check all items listed in Parts 1 through 3.
With CONSULT
I
NEAT0024S0401
Using CONSULT, conduct a cruise test and record the result. HA
I Print the result and ensure that shifts and lock-ups take place
as per “Shift Schedule”.
EL

IDX
SMA185C

AT-67
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
CONSULT Setting Procedure NEAT0024S0402
1. Turn ignition switch OFF.
2. Connect “CONSULT” to Data link connector for CONSULT.
Data link connector for CONSULT is located in instrument
lower panel on driver side.

SEF321V

3. Turn ignition switch ON.


4. Touch “START”.

SEF392I

5. Touch “A/T”.

SAT974H

6. Touch “DATA MONITOR”.

SAT385J

7. Touch “SETTING” to set recording condition.

SAT902H

AT-68
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
8. Touch “LONG TIME” and “ENTER” key.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT297C

9. Go back to SELECT MONITOR ITEM and touch “MAIN SIG-


NALS”. EC
10. Touch “START”.
FE

CL

MT
SAT903H

11. When performing cruise test, touch “RECORD”.


AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT071H

12. After finishing cruise test part 1, touch “STOP”.


RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT072H

13. Touch “DISPLAY”.


BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT301C

AT-69
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
14. Touch “PRINT”.

SAT904H

15. Touch “PRINT” again.

SAT905H

16. Check the monitor data printed out.


17. Continue cruise test part 2 and 3.

SAT906H

Without CONSULT NEAT0024S0403


I Throttle position can be checked by voltage across terminals
41 and 42 of TCM.

AAT474A

AT-70
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
Cruise Test — Part 1 =NEAT0024S0404
GI
1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1) POSITION
1. Drive vehicle for approx. 10 minutes to warm engine oil and ATF up to operating temperature.
ATF operating temperature: MA
50 - 80°C (122 - 176°F)
2. Park vehicle on flat surface.
3. Set overdrive control switch to ON position. EM
4. Move selector lever to P position.

LC

EC

FE

CL
SAT001J
5. Start engine.
6. Move selector lever to D position. MT

AT

TF

PD
SAT952I
7. Accelerate vehicle by constantly depressing accelerator pedal halfway.
FA

RA

BR

SAT953I
8. Does vehicle start from D1? ST
Read gear position.
Yes or No RS
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1”, AT-226.
BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-71
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)

2 CHECK SHIFT UP (D1 TO D2)


Does A/T shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D1 to D2:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-344.

SAT954I

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2”, AT-229.

3 CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3)


Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-344.

SAT955I

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3”, AT-232.

AT-72
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)

4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4) GI


Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle opening and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D3 to D4: MA
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-344.

EM

LC

EC
SAT956I

Yes or No FE
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © Go to “11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4”, AT-235. CL

5 CHECK LOCK-UP (D4 TO D4 L/U)


MT
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Read vehicle speed, throttle position when lock-up duty becomes 94%.
Specified speed when lock-up occurs: AT
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-344.

TF

PD

FA
SAT957I

Yes or No RA
Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Go to “12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up”, AT-238. BR

6 CHECK HOLD LOCK-UP


ST
Does A/T hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds?
Yes or No
RS
Yes © GO TO 7.
No © Go to “13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition”, AT-240.
BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-73
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)

7 CHECK LOCK-UP OFF (D4 L/U TO D4)


1. Release accelerator pedal.
2. Is lock-up released when accelerator pedal is released?

SAT958I

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 8.
No © Go to “14. Lock-up Is Not Released”, AT-242.

8 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO D3)


1. Decelerate vehicle by applying foot brake lightly.
2. Does engine speed return to idle smoothly when A/T is shifted from D4 to D3?
Read gear position and engine speed.

SAT959I

Yes or No
Yes © 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 2”, AT-75.
No © Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4, D3)”, AT-243.

AT-74
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
Cruise Test — Part 2 =NEAT0024S0405
GI
1 CHECK STARTING GEAR (D1) POSITION
1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in ON position.
2. Confirm selector lever is in D position. MA
3. Accelerate vehicle by half throttle again.
4. Does vehicle start from D1?
Read gear position. EM

LC

EC

FE

SAT495G
CL
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
MT
No © Go to “16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1”, AT-245.

2 CHECK SHIFT UP AND SHIFT DOWN (D3 TO D4 TO D2) AT


1. Accelerate vehicle to 80 km/h (50 MPH) as shown in illustration.
2. Release accelerator pedal and then quickly depress it fully. TF
3. Does A/T shift from D4 to D2 as soon as accelerator pedal is depressed fully?
Read gear position and throttle position.
PD

FA

RA

BR
SAT404H

Yes or No ST
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2”, AT-229.
RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-75
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)

3 CHECK SHIFT UP (D2 TO D3)


Does A/T shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed?
Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.
Specified speed when shifting from D2 to D3:
Refer to Shift schedule, AT-344.

SAT960I

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3”, AT-232.

4 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4) AND ENGINE BRAKE


Release accelerator pedal after shifting from D2 to D3.
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 and does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?
Read gear position, throttle position and vehicle speed.

SAT405H

Yes or No
Yes © 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Go to “Cruise test — Part 3”, AT-77.
No © Go to “11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D4”, AT-235.

AT-76
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)
Cruise Test — Part 3 =NEAT0024S0406
GI
1 VEHICLE SPEED D4 POSITION
1. Confirm overdrive control switch is in ON position.
2. Confirm selector lever is in D position. MA
3. Accelerate vehicle using half-throttle to D4.

EM

LC

EC

FE
SAT812A

© GO TO 2. CL

2 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D4 TO D3) MT


1. Release accelerator pedal.
2. Set overdrive control switch to OFF position while driving in D4.
3. Does A/T shift from D4 to D3 (O/D OFF)? AT
Read gear position and vehicle speed.

TF

PD

FA

RA
SAT999I

Yes or No
BR
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Go to “17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 , D3, When Overdrive Control Switch “ON” , “OFF”,
AT-246. ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-77
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)

3 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE


Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?

SAT999I

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3)”, AT-243.

4 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (D3 TO D2)


1. Move selector lever from D to 2 position while driving in D3 (O/D OFF).
2. Does A/T shift from D3 (O/D OFF) to 22?
Read gear position.

SAT791GA

Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 5.
No © Go to “18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 , D2, When Selector Lever “D” , “2” Position”,
AT-247.

AT-78
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)

5 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE GI


Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?

MA

EM

LC

EC
SAT791GA

Yes or No
FE
Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3)”, AT-243.
CL
6 CHECK SHIFT DOWN (22 TO 11)
1. Move selector lever from 2 to 1 position while driving in 22. MT
2. Does A/T shift from 22 to 11 position?

AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT778B

Yes or No
RA
Yes © GO TO 7.
No © Go to “19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 , 11, When Selector lever 2 , 1 Position”, AT-248.
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-79
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — BASIC INSPECTION
Road Test (Cont’d)

7 CHECK ENGINE BRAKE


Does vehicle decelerate by engine brake?

SAT778B

Yes or No
Yes © 1. Stop vehicle.
2. Perform self-diagnosis. Refer to TCM Self-Diagnosis Procedure (No Tools), AT-46.
No © Go to “20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake”, AT-249.

AT-80
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart

Symptom Chart
Numbers are arranged in the order of inspection.
NEAT0026 GI
Perform inspections starting with number one and work up.
Diagnostic item Nos. in OFF vehicle indicate that the transmission must be removed for the inspection.
MA
Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page

1. Ignition switch and starter EL-29


Engine does not start in N, P posi- EM
tions. ON vehicle 2. Control linkage AT-266
AT-214
3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265
LC
Engine starts in position other than 1. Control linkage AT-266
N and P positions. ON vehicle
AT-214 2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265 EC
1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Line pressure AT-62 FE


3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section
ON vehicle
Transmission noise in P and N posi- 4. Revolution sensor and vehicle speed
AT-111, AT-201 CL
tions. sensor

5. Engine speed signal AT-116


MT
6. Oil pump AT-285
OFF vehicle
7. Torque converter AT-274
AT
Vehicle moves when changing into
ON vehicle 1. Control linkage AT-266
P position or parking gear does not
disengage when shifted out of “P”
TF
position.
OFF vehicle 2. Parking components AT-325
AT-214

1. Control linkage AT-266 PD


ON vehicle
2. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R) AT-264
Vehicle runs in N position.
AT-216
3. Forward clutch AT-308 FA
OFF vehicle 4. Reverse clutch AT-302

5. Overrun clutch AT-308 RA


1. Control linkage AT-266

2. Line pressure AT-62 BR


ON vehicle
3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165
Vehicle will not run in R position 4. Control valve assembly AT-264 ST
(but runs in D, 2 and 1 positions).
Clutch slips. 5. Reverse clutch AT-302
Very poor acceleration.
AT-220 6. High clutch AT-306 RS
OFF vehicle 7. Forward clutch AT-308

8. Overrun clutch AT-308 BT


9. Low & reverse brake AT-312
HA

EL

IDX

AT-81
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page

1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Control linkage AT-266

ON vehicle 3. Line pressure AT-62

4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165


Vehicle braked when shifting into R
5. Control valve assembly AT-264
position.
6. High clutch AT-306

7. Brake band AT-321


OFF vehicle
8. Forward clutch AT-308

9. Overrun clutch AT-308

1. Engine idling rpm AT-62

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

3. Line pressure AT-62

4. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-105


Sharp shock in shifting from N to D ON vehicle
5. Engine speed signal AT-116
position.
6. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165

7. Control valve assembly AT-264

8. Accumulator N-D AT-264

OFF vehicle 9. Forward clutch AT-308

Vehicle will not run in D and 2 posi- ON vehicle 1. Control linkage AT-266
tions (but runs in 1 and R posi-
tions). OFF vehicle 2. Low one-way clutch AT-316

1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Line pressure AT-62

ON vehicle 3. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165

4. Control valve assembly AT-264


Vehicle will not run in D, 1, 2 posi-
tions (but runs in R position). Clutch 5. Accumulator N-D AT-264
slips. Very poor acceleration. 6. Reverse clutch AT-302
AT-223
7. High clutch AT-306

OFF vehicle 8. Forward clutch AT-308

9. Forward one-way clutch AT-308

10. Low one-way clutch AT-316

AT-82
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page GI


1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Control linkage AT-266


MA
3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

4. Line pressure AT-62 EM


ON vehicle
5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165

6. Control valve assembly AT-264 LC


Clutches or brakes slip somewhat in
7. Accumulator N-D AT-264
starting.
8. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R) AT-264 EC
9. Forward clutch AT-308

10. Reverse clutch AT-302 FE


OFF vehicle 11. Low & reverse brake AT-312

12. Oil pump AT-285 CL


13. Torque converter AT-274

Excessive creep. ON vehicle 1. Engine idling rpm EC section MT


1. Fluid level AT-59

ON vehicle 2. Line pressure AT-62 AT


No creep at all. 3. Control valve assembly AT-264
AT-220, AT-223 4. Forward clutch AT-308 TF
OFF vehicle 5. Oil pump AT-285

6. Torque converter AT-274 PD


1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265

2. Control linkage AT-266 FA


Failure to change gear from D1 to ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171
D2. 4. Control valve assembly AT-264 RA
5. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201

OFF vehicle 6. Brake band AT-321 BR


1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265

2. Control linkage AT-266 ST


ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve B AT-176
Failure to change gear from D2 to RS
4. Control valve assembly AT-264
D3.
5. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-105, AT-201

6. High clutch AT-306 BT


OFF vehicle
7. Brake band AT-321
HA

EL

IDX

AT-83
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265

2. Control linkage AT-266

Failure to change gear from D3 to ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171


D4. 4. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201

5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-105

OFF vehicle 6. Brake band AT-321

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section


Too high a gear change point from
D1 to D2, from D2 to D3, from D3 to 2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201
ON vehicle
D4. 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171
AT-229, AT-232, AT-235
4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-176

1. Fluid level AT-59


Gear change directly from D1 to D3 ON vehicle
2. Accumulator 1-2 AT-264
occurs.
OFF vehicle 3. Brake band AT-321

1. Engine idling rpm AT-62

Engine stops when shifting lever ON vehicle 2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-150
into R, D, 2 and 1. 3. Control valve assembly AT-264

OFF vehicle 4. Torque converter AT-274

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

2. Line pressure AT-62

Too sharp a shock in change from ON vehicle 3. Accumulator 1-2 AT-264


D1 to D2. 4. Control valve assembly AT-264

5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-105

OFF vehicle 6. Brake band AT-321

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

2. Line pressure AT-62


ON vehicle
Too sharp a shock in change from 3. Accumulator 2-3 AT-264
D2 to D3. 4. Control valve assembly AT-264

5. High clutch AT-306


OFF vehicle
6. Brake band AT-321

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

2. Line pressure AT-62


ON vehicle
Too sharp a shock in change from 3. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R) AT-264
D3 to D4. 4. Control valve assembly AT-264

5. Brake band AT-321


OFF vehicle
6. Overrun clutch AT-308

AT-84
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page GI


1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section


MA
Almost no shock or clutches slip- ON vehicle 3. Line pressure AT-62
ping in change from D1 to D2. 4. Accumulator 1-2 AT-264 EM
5. Control valve assembly AT-264

OFF vehicle 6. Brake band AT-321 LC


1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section EC


ON vehicle 3. Line pressure AT-62
Almost no shock or slipping in
change from D2 to D3 .
4. Accumulator 2-3 AT-264 FE
5. Control valve assembly AT-264

6. High clutch AT-306 CL


OFF vehicle
7. Brake band AT-321

1. Fluid level AT-59 MT


2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

ON vehicle 3. Line pressure AT-62 AT


Almost no shock or slipping in
4. Accumulator 3-4 (N-R) AT-264
change from D3 to D4 .
5. Control valve assembly AT-264 TF
6. High clutch AT-306
OFF vehicle
7. Brake band AT-321 PD
ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Reverse clutch AT-302 FA


Vehicle braked by gear change from
3. Low & reverse brake AT-312
D1 to D2. OFF vehicle
4. High clutch AT-306 RA
5. Low one-way clutch AT-316

Vehicle braked by gear change from ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-59 BR


D2 to D3. OFF vehicle 2. Brake band AT-321

ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-59 ST


Vehicle braked by gear change from 2. Overrun clutch AT-308
D3 to D4. OFF vehicle 3. Forward one-way clutch AT-308 RS
4. Reverse clutch AT-302
BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-85
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page

1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265

ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171

4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-176

5. Control valve assembly AT-264


Maximum speed not attained.
6. Reverse clutch AT-302
Acceleration poor.
7. High clutch AT-306

8. Brake band AT-321


OFF vehicle
9. Low & reverse brake AT-312

10. Oil pump AT-285

11. Torque converter AT-274

1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-190


ON vehicle
Failure to change gear from D4 to 4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171
D3. 5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165

6. Control valve assembly AT-264

7. Low & reverse brake AT-312


OFF vehicle
8. Overrun clutch AT-308

1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171


Failure to change gear from D3 to
4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-176
D2 or from D4 to D2.
5. Control valve assembly AT-264

6. High clutch AT-306


OFF vehicle
7. Brake band AT-321

1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171

Failure to change gear from D2 to 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-176


D1 or from D3 to D1. 5. Control valve assembly AT-264

6. Low one-way clutch AT-316

OFF vehicle 7. High clutch AT-306

8. Brake band AT-321

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section


Gear change shock felt during 2. Line pressure AT-62
deceleration by releasing accelera- ON vehicle
tor pedal. 3. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-190

4. Control valve assembly AT-264

AT-86
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page GI


Too high a change point from D4 to 1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section
ON vehicle
D3, from D3 to D2, from D2 to D1. 2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201
MA
1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section
Kickdown does not operate when 2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201
depressing pedal in D4 within kick- ON vehicle
EM
down vehicle speed. 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171

4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-176 LC


1. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201
Kickdown operates or engine over-
runs when depressing pedal in D4 2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section EC
ON vehicle
beyond kickdown vehicle speed 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171
limit.
4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-176 FE
1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section CL


ON vehicle 3. Line pressure AT-62
Races extremely fast or slips in
changing from D4 to D3 when 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165 MT
depressing pedal.
5. Control valve assembly AT-264

6. High clutch AT-306 AT


OFF vehicle
7. Forward clutch AT-308

1. Fluid level AT-59 TF


2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

3. Line pressure AT-62 PD


ON vehicle
Races extremely fast or slips in 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165
changing from D4 to D2 when
depressing pedal. 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171 FA
6. Control valve assembly AT-264

7. Brake band AT-321 RA


OFF vehicle
8. Forward clutch AT-308

1. Fluid level AT-59 BR


2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

3. Line pressure AT-62 ST


ON vehicle 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165
Races extremely fast or slips in 5. Control valve assembly AT-264 RS
changing from D3 to D2 when
depressing pedal. 6. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-105

7. Accumulator 2-3 AT-264 BT


8. Brake band AT-321

OFF vehicle 9. Forward clutch AT-308 HA


10. High clutch AT-306
EL

IDX

AT-87
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page

1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

ON vehicle 3. Line pressure AT-62


Races extremely fast or slips in 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165
changing from D4 or D3 to D1 when
depressing pedal. 5. Control valve assembly AT-264

6. Forward clutch AT-308

OFF vehicle 7. Forward one-way clutch AT-308

8. Low one-way clutch AT-316

1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Control linkage AT-266


ON vehicle
3. Line pressure AT-62

4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165

Vehicle will not run in any position. 5. Oil pump AT-285

6. High clutch AT-306

OFF vehicle 7. Brake band AT-321

8. Low & reverse brake AT-312

9. Torque converter AT-274

Transmission noise in D, 2, 1 and R ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-59


positions. OFF vehicle 2. Torque converter AT-274

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265

2. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-150

ON vehicle 4. Shift solenoid valve B AT-176


Failure to change from D3 to 2
when changing lever into 2 position. 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171
AT-243
6. Control valve assembly AT-264

7. Control linkage AT-266

8. Brake band AT-321


OFF vehicle
9. Overrun clutch AT-308

Gear change from 22 to 23 in 2


ON vehicle 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265
position.

AT-88
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page GI


1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265

2. Control linkage AT-266


MA
3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

ON vehicle 4. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-105, AT-201 EM


Engine brake does not operate in 1
position. 5. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171
AT-245
6. Control valve assembly AT-264 LC
7. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-190

8. Overrun clutch AT-308 EC


OFF vehicle
9. Low & reverse brake AT-312

Gear change from 11 to 12 in 1 1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265 FE


ON vehicle
position. 2. Control linkage AT-266

1. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265 CL


2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201

ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171 MT


Does not change from 12 to 11 in 1
4. Control valve assembly AT-264
position.
5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-190 AT
6. Overrun clutch AT-308
OFF vehicle
7. Low & reverse brake AT-312 TF
Large shock changing from 12 to 11 ON vehicle 1. Control valve assembly AT-264
in 1 position. OFF vehicle 2. Low & reverse brake AT-312 PD
1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Engine idling rpm AT-62 FA


3. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section
ON vehicle
4. Line pressure AT-62 RA
5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165

6. Control valve assembly AT-264 BR


7. Oil pump AT-285
Transmission overheats.
8. Reverse clutch AT-302 ST
9. High clutch AT-306

10. Brake band AT-321 RS


OFF vehicle
11. Forward clutch AT-308

12. Overrun clutch AT-308 BT


13. Low & reverse brake AT-312

14. Torque converter AT-274 HA

EL

IDX

AT-89
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page

ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Reverse clutch AT-302

3. High clutch AT-306


ATF shoots out during operation.
White smoke emitted from exhaust 4. Brake band AT-321
pipe during operation. OFF vehicle
5. Forward clutch AT-308

6. Overrun clutch AT-308

7. Low & reverse brake AT-312

ON vehicle 1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Torque converter AT-274

3. Oil pump AT-285

4. Reverse clutch AT-302


Offensive smell at fluid charging
5. High clutch AT-306
pipe. OFF vehicle
6. Brake band AT-321

7. Forward clutch AT-308

8. Overrun clutch AT-308

9. Low & reverse brake AT-312

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201

3. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265

4. Engine speed signal AT-116


ON vehicle
Torque converter is not locked up. 5. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-105

6. Line pressure AT-62

7. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-150

8. Control valve assembly AT-264

OFF vehicle 9. Torque converter AT-274

1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Line pressure AT-62

3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-150


ON vehicle
Torque converter clutch piston slip. 4. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165

5. Line pressure solenoid valve AT-165

6. Control valve assembly AT-264

OFF vehicle 7. Torque converter AT-274

1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section


Lock-up point is extremely high or 2. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201
low. ON vehicle
AT-238 3. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-150

4. Control valve assembly AT-264

AT-90
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
Symptom Chart (Cont’d)

Symptom Condition Diagnostic Item Reference Page GI


1. Throttle position sensor (Adjustment) EC section

2. Park/neutral position (PNP) switch AT-265


MA
3. Revolution sensor and speed sensor AT-111, AT-201

4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171 EM


ON vehicle
A/T does not shift to D4 when driv- 5. Overrun clutch solenoid valve AT-190
ing with overdrive control switch
ON. 6. Control valve assembly AT-264 LC
7. A/T fluid temperature sensor AT-105

8. Line pressure AT-62 EC


9. Brake band AT-321
OFF vehicle
10. Overrun clutch AT-308 FE
1. Fluid level AT-59

2. Torque converter clutch solenoid valve AT-150 CL


Engine is stopped at R, D, 2 and 1
ON vehicle 3. Shift solenoid valve B AT-176
positions.
4. Shift solenoid valve A AT-171 MT
5. Control valve assembly AT-264

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-91
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value

TCM Terminals and Reference Value =NEAT0027


PREPARATION NEAT0027S01
I Measure voltage between each terminal and terminal 25 or 48
by following “TCM INSPECTION TABLE”.

AAT475A

TCM HARNESS CONNECTOR TERMINAL LAYOUTNEAT0027S02

AAT494A

TCM INSPECTION TABLE NEAT0027S03


(Data are reference values.)
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

When releasing accelerator pedal


1.5 - 2.5V
Line pressure sole- after warming up engine.
1 GY/R
noid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0.5V or less
fully after warming up engine.

Line pressure sole- When releasing accelerator pedal


5 - 14V
noid valve after warming up engine.
2 BR/Y
(with dropping When depressing accelerator pedal
resistor 0.5V or less
fully after warming up engine.

Torque converter When A/T performs lock-up Battery voltage


3 G/OR clutch solenoid When A/T does not performs
valve 1V or less
lock-up

5*1 PU/W DT1 — —

6*1 P/B DT2 — — —

7*1 G/R DT3 — —

When turning ignition ON. Battery voltage

10 W/R Power source or

When turning ignition OFF. 1V or less

AT-92
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

Terminal Judgement GI
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

When shift solenoid valve A oper-


ates. Battery voltage MA
Shift solenoid (When driving in D1 or D4.)
11 L/W
valve A When shift solenoid valve A does
not operates. 1V or less EM
(When driving in D2 or D3.)

When shift solenoid valve B oper- LC


ates. Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in D1 or D2.)
12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does EC
not operates. 1V or less
(When driving in D3 or D4.)

When setting overdrive control


FE
1V or less
switch in OFF position.
O/D OFF indicator
13 Y
lamp CL
When setting overdrive control
Battery voltage
switch in ON position.

15*1 Y/G OBD-II — — — MT


When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine. [Refer to
“Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG- Battery voltage AT
Closed throttle NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO
position switch (in TOOLS)”, AT-46]
16 BR/W
throttle position When depressing accelerator pedal TF
switch) after warming up engine. [Refer to
“Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG- 1V or less
NOSTIC PROCEDURE (NO PD
TOOLS)”, AT-46]

When depressing accelerator pedal


Wide open throttle more than half-way after warming Battery voltage
FA
position switch (in up engine.
17 OR/B
throttle position
switch) When releasing accelerator pedal
1V or less RA
after warming up engine.

When ASCD cruise is being per-


formed. (“CRUISE ” light comes Battery voltage BR
ASCD cruise sig- on.)
18 B/Y
nal When ASCD cruise is not being
performed. (“CRUISE ” light does 1V or less
ST
not comes on.)

RS

19 W/R Power source or Same as No. 10


BT

When overrun clutch solenoid valve HA


Battery voltage
operates.
Overrun clutch
20 L/B
solenoid valve
When overrun clutch shift solenoid EL
1V or less
valve does not operates.

IDX

AT-93
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

When setting overdrive control


1V or less
switch in OFF position
Overdrive control
22 R
switch
When setting overdrive control
Battery voltage
switch in ON position

When ASCD permits O/D. 5 - 8V


ASCD O/D cut sig-
24 GY
nal When ASCD requires O/D to be
1V or less
OFF.

25 B/Y Ground or — 0V

When setting selector lever to 1


Park/neutral posi- Battery voltage
position.
26 G/B tion (PNP) switch
1 position When setting selector lever to other
1V or less
position.

When setting selector lever to 2


Park/neutral posi- Battery voltage
position.
27 G/W tion (PNP) switch
2 position When setting selector lever to other
1V or less
position.

When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage


Power source
28 R/Y or
(Memory back-up)
When turning ignition switch to
Battery voltage
OFF.

1V or more
Voltage rises
Revolution sensor When vehicle cruise at 30 km/h (19
gradually in
29 B/R (Measure in AC MPH).
response to
range) vehicle speed.

When vehicle parks. 0V

30*2 Y/R CONSULT data in — — —

CONSULT data
31*2 GY/L — — —
out

Throttle position
32 B/W sensor (Power — 4.5 - 5.5V
source)

33 — — — — —

AT-94
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — GENERAL DESCRIPTION
TCM Terminals and Reference Value (Cont’d)

Terminal Judgement GI
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

When setting selector lever to D


Park/neutral posi- Battery voltage
position. MA
34 L tion (PNP) switch
D position When setting selector lever to other
1V or less
position.
EM
When setting selector lever to R
Park/neutral posi- Battery voltage
position.
35 Y/R tion (PNP) switch
R position When setting selector lever to other LC
1V or less
position.

When setting selector lever to P or EC


Park/neutral posi- Battery voltage
N position.
36 P tion (PNP) switch
P or N position When setting selector lever to other
1V or less
position. FE

Engine speed sig- CL


39 P/L When engine runs at idle speed. 0.5 - 2.5V
nal

MT
Voltage varies
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3
Vehicle speed sen- between less
40 G/B
sor
km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1m (3 ft) or
than 1V and
AT
more.
more than 4.5V

Fully-closed TF
throttle:
When depressing accelerator pedal Approximately
41 OR/L
Throttle position slowly after warming up engine. 0.5V PD
sensor (Voltage rises gradually in response Fully-open
to throttle position.) throttle:
Approximately FA
4V

Throttle position
42 BR — —
sensor (Ground) RA
When ATF temperature is 20°C Approximately
(68°F). 1.5V
47 R/B
A/T fluid tempera- BR
ture sensor
When ATF temperature is 80°C Approximately
(176°F). 0.5V
ST

48 B/Y Ground or — 0V RS

BT
*1: These terminals are connected to the ECM.
*2: These terminals are connected to the Data link connector for CONSULT.
HA

EL

IDX

AT-95
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN

Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN NEAT0185

AAT295A

AT-96
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN (Cont’d)
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
NEAT0185S01
GI
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard
MA
When turning ignition switch to
Battery voltage
“ON”.
10 W/R Power source EM
When turning ignition switch to
1V or less
“OFF”.

19 W/R Power source Same as No. 10 LC


25 B/Y Ground — — —

When turning ignition switch to


EC
Battery voltage
Power source “OFF”.
28 R/Y (Memory back- or
up) FE
When turning ignition switch to
Battery voltage
“ON”.

CL

48 B/Y Ground — —
MT

1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE AT


1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground. TF

PD

FA

RA
AAT476A
Voltage: Battery voltage
3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. BR
4. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following items: RS
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28
(Main harness)
I Ignition switch and fuse BT
Refer to EL section (“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”).

HA

EL

IDX

AT-97
TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY
Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN (Cont’d)

2 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check continuity between terminals 25, 48 and ground.

AAT477A
Continuity should exist.
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

AT-98
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Description

Description NEAT0028
GI
I The Park/neutral position (PNP) switch assembly includes a
transmission range switch.
I The transmission range switch detects the selector position MA
and sends a signal to the TCM.

EM

LC
AAT478A

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE


Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
NEAT0028S02
EC
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard FE
When setting selector lever to 1
Park/neutral Battery voltage
position.
26 G/B position (PNP) CL
switch 1 position When setting selector lever to other
1V or less
positions.

When setting selector lever to 2


Battery voltage
MT
Park/neutral position.
27 G/W position (PNP)
switch 2 position When setting selector lever to other
positions.
1V or less AT

Park/neutral When setting selector lever to D


Battery voltage
position (PNP) position. TF
34 L
switch D posi- When setting selector lever to other
tion 1V or less
positions.
PD
Park/neutral When setting selector lever to R
Battery voltage
position (PNP) position.
35 Y
switch R posi- When setting selector lever to other FA
tion 1V or less
positions.

When setting selector lever to N or


Park/neutral
P position.
Battery voltage RA
position (PNP)
36 G/R
switch N or P When setting selector lever to other
position 1V or less
positions. BR
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0028S03
ST
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause)

: PNP SW/CIRC I Harness or connectors


TCM does not receive the correct voltage
(The park/neutral position (PNP) switch RS
: P0705 signal from the switch based on the gear
circuit is open or shorted.)
position.
: MIL Code No. 1101 I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-99
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE NEAT0028S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch “OFF” and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting
the next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
SEF895K malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch “ON”.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
3) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.3V
Selector lever: D position (OD “ON” or “OFF”)
With GST
1) Start engine.
SAT911I 2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “ON”
or “OFF” position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH),
throttle position sensor more than 1.3V and driving for more
than 5 seconds.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in “D” position, overdrive control switch in “ON”
or “OFF” position, vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH),
throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the full throttle position and
driving for more than 5 seconds.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-100
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW

Wiring Diagram — AT — PNP/SW NEAT0186 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT296A
IDX

AT-101
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0029

1 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT)


With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to “ON” position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out P, R, N, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector
lever position is indicated properly.

SAT761I

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following items:
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-104.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP)
switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main
harness)
I Diode (P, N positions)

AT-102
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT) GI


Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.) MA
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals (26, 27, 34, 35, 36) and ground while moving selector lever through each posi-
tion.
EM

LC

EC

AAT480A FE

CL

MT

AT
AAT479A

Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?


TF
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Check the following items:
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch PD
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-104.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP)
switch (Main harness) FA
I Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main
harness)
I Diode (P, N positions) RA

3 CHECK DTC
BR
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-100.
OK or NG
ST
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- RS
nector.

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-103
DTC P0705 PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION SWITCH
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0030


PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH NEAT0030S02
1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between ter-
minals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through
each position.
Lever position Terminal No.

P 3-4 1-2

R 3-5
SAT517GB N 3-6 1-2

D 3-7

2 3-8

1 3-9

AAT482A

2. If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected


from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1.
3. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-266.

AAT551A

4. If NG on step 2, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch


from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP)
switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
5. If OK on step 4, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
Refer to AT-265.
6. If NG on step 4, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.

AAT481A

AT-104
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description

Description NEAT0031
GI
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
and sends a signal to the TCM.
MA

EM

LC
SAT342HA

EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT021J

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR


MODE AT
NEAT0031S04
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item Condition Specification TF


Cold [20°C (68°F)] Approximately 1.5V
A/T fluid temperature sensor " "
Hot [80°C (176°F)] Approximately 0.5V PD

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE


Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
NEAT0031S02
FA
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard RA
Throttle position
42 BR sensor — —
(Ground) BR
When ATF temperature is 20°C Approximately
(68°F). 1.5V
47 R/B
A/T fluid tem- ST
perature sensor When ATF temperature is 80°C Approximately
(176°F). 0.5V
RS
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0031S03

Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause) BT
: ATF TEMP SEN/CIRC
I Harness or connectors
TCM receives an excessively low or high
: P0710 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) HA
voltage from the sensor.
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
: MIL Code No. 1208

EL

IDX

AT-105
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE NEAT0031S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
SEF895K malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
10 minutes (Total). (It is not necessary to maintain continu-
ously.)
CMPS·RPM (REF): 450 rpm or more
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
SAT911I
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D (O/D ON) position, vehicle speed higher
than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the
full open position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driv-
ing for more than 10 minutes (Total).
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D (O/D ON) position, vehicle speed higher
than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the
full open position, engine speed higher than 450 rpm and driv-
ing for more than 10 minutes (Total).
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-106
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS

Wiring Diagram — AT — FTS NEAT0187 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT297A
IDX

AT-107
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0032

1 CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
3. Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)].

AAT483A

Is resistance approx. 2.5 kΩ?


Yes © GO TO 2.
No © 1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check the following items:
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-110.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

AT-108
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR GI


With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT. MA
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]: EM
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V

LC

EC

FE

SAT076H
CL
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine. MT
2. Check voltage between TCM harness connector M78 terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.

AT

TF

PD
AAT484A
Voltage: FA
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
OK or NG RA
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following item: BR
I Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)

3 CHECK DTC
ST
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-106.
OK or NG RS
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. BT
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
HA

EL

IDX

AT-109
DTC P0710 A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR CIRCUIT
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0033


A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR NEAT0033S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
I Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 while changing
temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance

20 (68) Approximately 2.5 kΩ

80 (176) Approximately 0.3 kΩ


AAT485A

AT-110
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description

Description NEAT0034
GI
The revolution sensor detects the revolution of the out put shaft
parking pawl lock gear and emits a pulse signal. The pulse signal
is sent to the TCM which converts it into vehicle speed.
MA

EM

LC
AAT478A

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE


Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
NEAT0034S02
EC
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard FE
1V or more
Revolution sen- Voltage rises
When vehicle cruises at 30 km/h
sor (19 MPH).
gradually in CL
29 B/R response to
(Measure in AC
range) vehicle speed.

When vehicle parks. 0V MT

Throttle position AT
42 BR sensor — —
(Ground)
TF
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0034S03

Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause)
PD
: VEH SPD SEN/CIR AT
I Harness or connectors FA
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
: P0720 (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
signal from the sensor.
I Revolution sensor
: MIL Code No. 1102
RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-111
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE NEAT0034S01
CAUTION:
I Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
SAT974H next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT.
2) Drive vehicle and check for an increase of “VHCL/S SE·A/T”
value in response to “VHCL/S SE·MTR” value increase.
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
AT-204.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
SAT385J 3) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT.
4) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
5 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 30 km/h (19 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Driving condition: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
AT-114.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
SEF895K 5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 5 consecutive
seconds.
CMPS·RPM (REF): 3,500 rpm or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Driving condition: Driving the vehicle uphill (increased
engine load) will help maintain the driving conditions
required for this test.
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D (O/D ON) position, vehicle speed higher
SAT911I than 30 km/h (19 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the
full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D (O/D ON) position, vehicle speed higher
than 30 km/h (19 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the
full throttle position and driving for more than 5 seconds.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-112
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSA/T NEAT0188 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT298A
IDX

AT-113
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0035

1 CHECK REVOLUTION SENSOR


Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-115.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace revolution sensor.

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL


With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·A/T” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.

SAT076H

Without CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 29 and ground while driving.
(Measure with AC range.)

AAT486A
Voltage:
At 0 km/h (0 MPH):
0V
At 30 km/h (19 MPH):
1V or more
(Voltage rises gradually in response to vehicle speed.)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between TCM and revolution sensor (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between revolution sensor and ECM (Main harness)
I Ground circuit for ECM
Refer to EC section (“TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR POWER SUPPLY”).

AT-114
DTC P0720 VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T (REVOLUTION SENSOR)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DTC GI
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-112.
OK or NG
MA
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- EM
nector.

LC

Component Inspection NEAT0036


EC
REVOLUTION SENSOR NEAT0036S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
I Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2. FE
Terminal No. Resistance

1 2 500 - 650Ω CL

MT
AAT487A

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-115
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Description

Description NEAT0037
The engine speed signal is sent from the ECM to the TCM.
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NEAT0037S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

Engine speed
39 P/L When engine runs at idle speed. 0.5 - 2.5V
signal

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0037S03

Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause)

: ENGINE SPEED SIG


TCM does not receive the proper voltage I Harness or connectors
: P0725
signal from ECM. (The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
: MIL Code No. 1207

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION


PROCEDURE NEAT0037S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
SEF895K malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
10 consecutive seconds.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: More than 1.2V
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
With GST
1) Start engine.
SAT911I 2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D (O/D ON) position, vehicle speed higher
than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the
full throttle position and driving for more than 10 seconds.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D (O/D ON) position, vehicle speed higher
than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/8 of the
full throttle position and driving for more than 10 consecutive
seconds.

AT-116
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Description (Cont’d)
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON GI
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-117
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS

Wiring Diagram — AT — ENGSS NEAT0189

AAT299A

AT-118
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0038 GI


1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM
Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Check ignition signal circuit condition.
MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check ignition signal circuit for engine control. Refer to EC section (“DTC P1320 IGNI-
EM
TION SIGNAL”).

LC
2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL
With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
EC
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “ENGINE SPEED”.
Check engine speed changes according to throttle position. FE

CL

MT

AT

SAT076H TF
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 39 and ground. PD

FA

RA

BR
AAT488A

Does battery voltage (idle speed) 0.5 - 2.5V? ST


Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Check the following items: RS
I Harness for short or open between TCM and ECM
I Resistor
I Ignition coil
Refer to EC section (“DTC P1320 IGNITION SIGNAL”).
BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-119
DTC P0725 ENGINE SPEED SIGNAL
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-116.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

AT-120
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description

Description NEAT0039 GI
I This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
I This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indi- MA
cator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
first gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused EM
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by
mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, etc. LC
Gear position 1 2 3 4

Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) EC


Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FE


NEAT0039S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal
Wire color Item Condition
Judgement CL
No. standard

When shift solenoid valve A oper-


ates. Battery voltage MT
Shift solenoid (When driving in D1 or D4.)
11 L/W
valve A When shift solenoid valve A does AT
not operate. 1V or less
(When driving in D2 or D3.)

When shift solenoid valve B oper- TF


ates. Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in D1 or D2.)
12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does PD
not operate. 1V or less
(When driving in D3 or D4.)
FA
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0039S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: RA
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM BR
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (1st) supposed
by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio ST
exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunc-
tion.
This malfunction will be caused when either shift solenoid valve A RS
is stuck open or shift solenoid valve B is stuck open.
Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 BT
In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A stuck open 2* 2 3 3 HA


In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck open 4* 3 3 4

*: P0731 is detected. EL

IDX

AT-121
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)

Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause)

: A/T 1ST GR FNCTN I Shift solenoid valve A


A/T cannot be shifted to the 1st gear posi- I Shift solenoid valve B
: P0731
tion even if electrical circuit is good. I Each clutch
: MIL Code No. 1103 I Hydraulic control circuit

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION


PROCEDURE NEAT0039S01
CAUTION:
I Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
SAT974H next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy of
test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
SAT385J
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “1ST GR FNCTN P0731” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 17 to 23 km/h (11 to 14 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
I Check that “GEAR” shows 2 after releasing pedal.
SAT021J 5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 17 to 23 km/h (11
to 14 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-125.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to the
following step.
I Check that “GEAR” shows 1 when depressing accelerator
pedal to WOT.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case

AT-122
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
a 1st trip DTC other than P0731 is shown, refer to appli-
cable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. GI
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.) MA
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
Vehicle condition
screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 EM
No malfunction exists 1,2,3,4

2,2,3,3 LC
Malfunction for P0731 exists.
4,3,3,4

8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer EC


to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-125.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344. FE
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF. CL
2) Accelerate vehicle to 17 to 23 km/h (11 to 14 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely. MT
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344. AT
3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 17 to 23 km/h (11
to 14 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) TF
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
PD
2) Accelerate vehicle to 17 to 23 km/h (12 to 14 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com- FA
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) RA
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 17 to 23 km/h (11 BR
to 14 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON ST
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-123
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST

Wiring Diagram — AT — 1ST NEAT0190

AAT610A

AT-124
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0040 GI


1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation. MA
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-126. EM

LC

EC

FE

SAT648I CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. MT
NG © Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly.

AT
2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-289. TF
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. PD
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
FA

RA

BR

ST
SAT367H

OK or NG RS
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair control valve assembly. BT

3 CHECK DTC
HA
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-122.
OK or NG
EL
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
IDX

AT-125
DTC P0731 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 1ST GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection

Component Inspection =NEAT0041


SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND B NEAT0041S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check NEAT0041S0101
I Check resistance between terminals (3 or 2) and ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Shift solenoid valve A 3


Ground 20 - 40Ω
Shift solenoid valve B 2
SAT649I

Operation Check NEAT0041S0102


I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminals (3 or 2) and ground.

SAT648I

AT-126
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description

Description NEAT0042 GI
I This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
I This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indi- MA
cator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
second gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not EM
caused by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but
by mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, etc. LC
Gear position 1 2 3 4

Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed) EC


Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE FE


NEAT0042S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal
Wire color Item Condition
Judgement CL
No. standard

When shift solenoid valve B oper-


ates. Battery voltage MT
Shift solenoid (When driving in “D1” or “D2”.)
12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does AT
not operate. 1V or less
(When driving in “D3” or “D4”.)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC TF


NEAT0042S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows: PD
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM FA
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (2nd) sup-
posed by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the
RA
ratio exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis mal-
function.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck
open.
BR

Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4


ST
In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B


4 3* 3 4
stuck open RS
*: P0732 is detected.
BT
Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)

: A/T 2ND SIGNAL HA


I Shift solenoid valve B
A/T cannot be shifted to the 2nd gear
: P0732 I Each clutch
position even if electrical circuit is good.
I Hydraulic control circuit EL
: MIL Code No. 1104

IDX

AT-127
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE NEAT0042S01
CAUTION:
I Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
SAT974H next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy
of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
SAT385J
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “2ND GR FNCTN P0732” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
I Check that “GEAR” shows 3 or 4 after releasing pedal.
SAT021J 5) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 50 to 55 km/h (31
to 34 MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-131.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to fol-
lowing step.
I Check that “GEAR” shows 2 when depressing accelerator
pedal to WOT.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case
a 1st trip DTC other than P0732 is shown, refer to appli-
cable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.)
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern when
Vehicle condition
screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4

No malfunction exists 1,2,3,4

Malfunction for P0732 exists. 4,3,3,4

8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer

AT-128
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, AT-131. Refer to shift schedule, AT-344. GI
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
MA
2) Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely. EM
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
LC
3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 50 to 55 km/h (31
to 34 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) EC
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine and warm up ATF. FE
2) Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 55 km/h (31 to 34 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely. CL
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344. MT
3) Depress accelerator pedal to WOT (more than 7/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI”) quickly from a speed of 50 to 55 km/h (31
to 34 MPH). (It will take approximately 3 seconds.) AT
4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON TF
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-129
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND

Wiring Diagram — AT — 2ND NEAT0191

AAT611A

AT-130
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0043 GI


1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation. MA
I Shift solenoid valve B
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-132.
EM

LC

EC

FE
SAT650I

OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. MT

2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE AT


1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-289.
2. Check to ensure that: TF
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. PD
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.

FA

RA

BR

ST
SAT367H

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
RS
NG © Repair control valve assembly.
BT
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-128. HA
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
EL
NG © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

IDX

AT-131
DTC P0732 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 2ND GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0044


SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B NEAT0044S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check NEAT0044S0101
I Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Shift solenoid valve B 2 Ground 20 - 40Ω

SAT651I

Operation Check NEAT0044S0102


I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.

SAT650I

AT-132
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description

Description NEAT0045 GI
I This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
I This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indi- MA
cator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
third gear position as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused EM
by electrical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by
mechanical malfunction such as control valve sticking,
improper solenoid valve operation, malfunctioning servo piston LC
or brake band, etc.
Gear position 1 2 3 4
EC
Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)

Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open)


FE
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NEAT0045S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
CL
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

When shift solenoid valve A oper- MT


ates. Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in D1 or D4.)
11 L/W
valve A AT
When shift solenoid valve A does
not operate. 1V or less
(When driving in D2 or D3.)
TF
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0045S03
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque PD
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor FA
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is higher than the position (3rd) supposed
RA
by TCM, the slip ratio will be more than normal. In case the ratio
exceeds the specified value, TCM judges this diagnosis malfunc-
tion.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve A is stuck
BR
closed.
Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4 ST
In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve A RS


1 1 4* 4
stuck closed

*: P0733 is detected.
BT
Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause) HA
: A/T 3RD GR FNCTN
I Shift solenoid valve A
A/T cannot be shifted to the 3rd gear
: P0733 I Each clutch EL
position even if electrical circuit is good.
I Hydraulic control circuit
: MIL Code No. 1105

IDX

AT-133
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE NEAT0045S01
CAUTION:
I Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
tachometer.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
SAT974H next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy
of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
SAT385J
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “3RD GR FNCTN P0733” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
4) Accelerate vehicle to 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8 (at all times during step 4)
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
I Check that “GEAR” shows 4 after releasing pedal.
SAT021J 5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53
MPH) until “TESTING” changes to “STOP VEHICLE” or “COM-
PLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-137.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to fol-
lowing step.
I Check that “GEAR” shows 3 when depressing accelerator
pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case
a 1st trip DTC other than P0733 is shown, refer to appli-
cable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.)
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern
Vehicle condition
when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4

No malfunction exists. 1,2,3,4

Malfunction for P0733 exists. 1,1,4,4

8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer

AT-134
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, AT-137. GI
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF. MA
2) Accelerate vehicle to 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com- EM
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
LC
3) Depress accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE
POSI” from a speed of 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH). (It will EC
take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools FE
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com- CL
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 1/8
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON) MT
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
3) Depress accelerator pedal with 3.5/8 - 4.5/8 of “THROTTLE
POSI” from a speed of 70 to 85 km/h (43 to 53 MPH). (It will AT
take approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM. TF
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-135
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD

Wiring Diagram — AT — 3RD NEAT0192

AAT603A

AT-136
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0046 GI


1 CHECK SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check shift solenoid valve operation. MA
I Shift solenoid valve A
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-138.
EM

LC

EC

FE
SAT653I

OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair or replace shift solenoid valve assembly. MT

2 CHECK CONTROL VALVE AT


1. Disassemble control valve assembly.
Refer to “Control Valve Assembly”, AT-289.
2. Check to ensure that: TF
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue. PD
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.

FA

RA

BR

ST
SAT367H

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
RS
NG © Repair control valve assembly.
BT
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-134. HA
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
EL
NG © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

IDX

AT-137
DTC P0733 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 3RD GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0047


SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A NEAT0047S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check NEAT0047S0101
I Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Shift solenoid valve A 3 Ground 20 - 40Ω

SAT654I

Operation Check NEAT0047S0102


I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.

SAT653I

AT-138
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description

Description NEAT0048 GI
I This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
I This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indi- MA
cator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not EM
lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by elec-
trical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical
malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid LC
valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter
clutch, etc.
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR EC
MODE NEAT0048S04
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
FE
Monitor item Condition Specification

Lock-up OFF Approximately 4%


Torque converter clutch sole-
" " CL
noid valve duty
Lock-up ON Approximately 94%

Small throttle opening MT


(Low line pressure) Approximately 24%
Line pressure solenoid valve
" "
duty
Large throttle opening Approximately 95%
(High line pressure) AT

Gear position 1 2 3 4 TF
Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)

Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) PD

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NEAT0048S02


Remarks: Specification data are reference values. FA
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard RA
When releasing accelerator pedal
1.5 - 2.5V
Line pressure after warming up engine.
1 GY/R
solenoid valve BR
When depressing accelerator pedal
0.5V or less
fully after warming up engine.

Line pressure When releasing accelerator pedal


5 - 14V
ST
solenoid valve after warming up engine.
2 BR/Y
(with dropping When depressing accelerator pedal
resistor) fully after warming up engine.
0.5V or less RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-139
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)

Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

Torque converter When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V


3 G/OR clutch solenoid When A/T does not perform lock-
valve 1V or less
up.

When shift solenoid valve A oper-


ates. Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in D1 or D4.)
11 L/W
valve A When shift solenoid valve A does
not operate. 1V or less
(When driving in D2 or D3.)

When shift solenoid valve B oper-


ates. Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in D1 or D2.)
12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does
not operate. 1V or less
(When driving in D3 or D4.)

When overrun clutch solenoid


Battery voltage
Overrun clutch valve operates.
20 L/B
solenoid valve When overrun clutch solenoid
1V or less
valve does not operate.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0048S03


This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th)
supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In
case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this
diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck
closed.
Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4

In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B


1 2 2 1*
stuck closed

*: P0734 is detected.

Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)

I Shift solenoid valve A


: A/T 4TH GR FNCTN
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
A/T cannot be shifted to the 4th gear
: P0734 I Line pressure solenoid valve
position even if electrical circuit is good.
I Each clutch
I Hydraulic control circuit
: MIL Code No. 1106
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve

AT-140
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE GI
NEAT0048S01
CAUTION:
I Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
I Be careful not to rev engine into the red zone on the
MA
tachometer.
NOTE: EM
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the LC
SAT974H next test.
TESTING CONDITIONS:
Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve the accuracy EC
of test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated. FE
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT. CL
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V MT
SAT385J
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid). AT
3) Select “4TH GR FNCTN P0734” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
TF
4) Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely. PD
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8 (at all times during step
4)
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
FA
SAT021J I Check that “GEAR” shows 3 after releasing pedal.
5) Depress accelerator pedal steadily with 1/8 - 2/8 of
“THROTTLE POSI” from a speed of 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 RA
MPH) until “TESTING” has turned to “STOP VEHICLE” or
“COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 3 seconds.)
If the check result NG appears on CONSULT screen, go to BR
“DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-144.
If “STOP VEHICLE” appears on CONSULT screen, go to fol-
lowing step. ST
I Check that “GEAR” shows 4 when depressing accelerator
pedal with 1/8 - 2/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”.
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long RS
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS” for “ENGINE”. In case
a 1st trip DTC other than P0734 is shown, refer to appli-
cable “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”. BT
6) Stop vehicle.
7) Follow the instruction displayed. (Check for normal shifting
referring to the table below.) HA
Gear on actual transmission shift pattern
Vehicle condition
when screen is changed to 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 EL
No malfunction exists 1,2,3,4

Malfunction for P0734 exists. 1,2,2,1 IDX

AT-141
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Description (Cont’d)
8) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer
to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.) Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC
PROCEDURE”, AT-144.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
3) Depress accelerator pedal with 1/8 - 2/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”
from a speed of 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 MPH). (It will take
approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Accelerate vehicle to 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 MPH) under the
following condition and release the accelerator pedal com-
pletely.
THROTTLE POSI: Less than 5.5/8
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
3) Depress accelerator pedal with 1/8 - 2/8 of “THROTTLE POSI”
from a speed of 50 to 60 km/h (31 to 37 MPH). (It will take
approximately 3 seconds.)
4) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-142
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH

Wiring Diagram — AT — 4TH NEAT0193 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT303A
IDX

AT-143
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0049

1 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)


During “Cruise test − Part 1”, AT-71.
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?

SAT988H

Yes or No
Yes © I GO TO 11.
I And check for proper lock-up.
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK LINE PRESSURE


Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-62.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 7.

AT-144
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK SOLENOID VALVES GI


1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-149.
MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT
SAT158J

OK or NG
TF
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly.
PD
4 CHECK CONTROL VALVE
1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-289. FA
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches. RA
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.
BR

ST

RS

BT
SAT367H

OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair control valve. EL

IDX

AT-145
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)


Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

6 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-141.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END AND GO TO 7.
NG © I GO TO 11.
I And check for proper lock-up.

7 CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE


1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-149.

SAT158J

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly.

AT-146
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK CONTROL VALVE GI


1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-289.
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
I Pressure regulator valve MA
I Pilot valve
I Pressure modifier valve
EM

LC

EC

FE
SAT367H

OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair control valve. MT

9 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)


AT
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
OK or NG
TF
OK © GO TO 10.
NG © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
PD
10 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-141. FA
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END AND GO TO 11. RA
NG © I GO TO 11.
I And check for proper lock-up.
BR
11 CHECK LOCK-UP
During “Cruise test − Part 1”, AT-71, ST
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Yes or No
RS
Yes © Perform “Cruise test − Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.
No © GO TO 12.
BT
12 CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264. HA
2. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-149.
OK or NG
EL
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly.
IDX

AT-147
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

13 CHECK CONTROL VALVE


1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-289.
2. Check control valves for sticking.
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Torque converter clutch relief valve

SAT367H

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14.
NG © Repair control valve

14 CHECK LOCK-UP
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 15.
No © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

15 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-141.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.

AT-148
DTC P0734 IMPROPER SHIFTING TO 4TH GEAR POSITION
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0050


GI
SOLENOID VALVES NEAT0050S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check MA
NEAT0050S0101
I Check resistance between terminals (3, 2, 4, 6 or 7) and
ground.
EM
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Shift solenoid valve A 3


LC
Shift solenoid valve B 2 20 - 40Ω

Overrun clutch solenoid valve 4


Ground EC
Line pressure solenoid valve 6 2.5 - 5Ω

Torque converter clutch sole-


noid valve
7 10 - 20Ω FE

CL

MT
SAT159J

Operation Check
I
NEAT0050S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while AT
applying battery voltage to the terminals (3, 2, 4, 6 or 7) and
ground.
TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT158J

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-149
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description

Description NEAT0051
The torque converter clutch solenoid valve is activated, with the
gear in “D4”, by the TCM in response to signals sent from the
vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Lock-up piston opera-
tion will then be controlled.
Lock-up operation, however, is prohibited when A/T fluid tempera-
ture is too low.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed (less than 2/8) in lock-up
condition, the engine speed should not change abruptly. If there is
a big jump in engine speed, there is no lock-up.
SAT342HA

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR


MODE NEAT0051S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item Condition Specification

Lock-up “OFF” Approximately 4%


Torque converter clutch sole-
" "
noid valve duty
Lock-up “ON” Approximately 94%

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NEAT0051S03


Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V


Torque converter
3 G/OR clutch solenoid
valve When A/T does not perform lock-
1V or less
up.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0051S04

Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)

: TCC SOLENOID/CIRC
TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: P0740 when it tires to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
valve. I T/C clutch solenoid valve
: MIL Code No. 1204

AT-150
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE GI
NEAT0051S01
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition MA
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
EM
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT LC
SEF895K 1) Turn ignition switch ON.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “ENGINE” with CONSULT
and wait at least 1 second. EC
With GST
1) Turn ignition switch ON.
FE
2) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Turn ignition switch ON. CL
2) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”]. MT
SAT911I

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-151
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCV NEAT0194

AAT304A

AT-152
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0052 GI


1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. MA
3. Check resistance between terminal 5 and ground.

EM

LC

EC

AAT552A
FE
Is resistance approx. 10 - 20 Ω?
Yes © GO TO 2.
CL
No © 1. Remove oil pan. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-154. MT
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

AT
2 CHECK RESISTANCE
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector. TF
3. Check resistance between terminal 5 and TCM harness connector terminal 3.

PD

FA

RA

AAT553A
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power. BR
Is resistance approx. 0Ω?
Yes © GO TO 3. ST
No © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS
3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-151.
BT
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
HA
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
EL

IDX

AT-153
DTC P0740 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0053


TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVENEAT0053S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check NEAT0053S0101
I Check resistance between terminal 7 and ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Torque converter clutch sole-


7 Ground 10 - 20Ω
noid valve
SAT160J

Operation Check NEAT0053S0102


I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 7 and ground.

SAT161J

AT-154
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description

Description NEAT0054 GI
I This is an OBD-II self-diagnostic item and not available in TCM
self-diagnosis.
I This malfunction will not be detected while the O/D OFF indi- MA
cator lamp is indicating another self-diagnosis malfunction.
I This malfunction is detected when the A/T does not shift into
fourth gear position or the torque converter clutch does not EM
lock up as instructed by the TCM. This is not caused by elec-
trical malfunction (circuits open or shorted) but by mechanical
malfunction such as control valve sticking, improper solenoid LC
valve operation, malfunctioning oil pump or torque converter
clutch, etc.
CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR EC
MODE NEAT0054S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
FE
Monitor item Condition Specification

Lock-up OFF Approximately 4%


Torque converter clutch sole-
" " CL
noid valve duty
Lock-up ON Approximately 94%

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE MT


NEAT0054S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal
Wire color Item Condition
Judgement AT
No. standard

When releasing accelerator pedal


1.5 - 2.5V TF
Line pressure after warming up engine.
1 GY/R
solenoid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0.5V or less
fully after warming up engine.
PD
Line pressure When releasing accelerator pedal
5 - 14V
solenoid valve after warming up engine.
2 BR/Y FA
(with dropping When depressing accelerator pedal
resistor) 0.5V or less
fully after warming up engine.

Torque converter When A/T performs lock-up. 8 - 15V RA


3 G/OR clutch solenoid When A/T does not perform lock-
valve 1V or less
up.
BR
When shift solenoid valve A oper-
ates. Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in D1 or D4.) ST
11 L/W
valve A When shift solenoid valve A does
not operate. 1V or less
(When driving in D2 or D3.) RS
When shift solenoid valve B oper-
ates. Battery voltage
(When driving in D1 or D2.) BT
Shift solenoid
12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does
not operate. 1V or less HA
(When driving in D3 or D4.)

When overrun clutch solenoid


Battery voltage
Overrun clutch valve operates. EL
20 L/B
solenoid valve When overrun clutch solenoid
1V or less
valve does not operate.
IDX

AT-155
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0054S04
This diagnosis monitors actual gear position by checking the torque
converter slip ratio calculated by TCM as follows:
Torque converter slip ratio = A x C/B
A: Output shaft revolution signal from revolution sensor
B: Engine speed signal from ECM
C: Gear ratio determined as gear position which TCM supposes
If the actual gear position is much lower than the position (4th)
supposed by TCM, the slip ratio will be much less than normal. In
case the ratio does not reach the specified value, TCM judges this
diagnosis malfunction.
This malfunction will be caused when shift solenoid valve B is stuck
closed.
Gear position supposed by TCM 1 2 3 4

In case of gear position with no malfunctions 1 2 3 4

In case of gear position with shift solenoid valve B stuck closed 1 2 2 1*

*: P0744 is detected.

Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause)

: A/T TCC S/V FNCTN


I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
A/T cannot perform lock-up even if elec-
: P0744 I Each clutch
trical circuit is good.
I Hydraulic control circuit
: MIL Code No. 1107

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION


PROCEDURE NEAT0054S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
SAT974H malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with
CONSULT.
2) Make sure that output voltage of A/T fluid temperature sensor
is within the range below.
FLUID TEMP SEN: 0.4 - 1.5V
If out of range, drive the vehicle to decrease the voltage (warm
up the fluid) or stop engine to increase the voltage (cool down
the fluid).
3) Select “TCC S/V FNCTN P0744” of “DTC WORK SUPPORT”
mode for “A/T” with CONSULT and touch “START”.
SAT385J

AT-156
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Description (Cont’d)
4) Accelerate vehicle to more than 70 km/h (43 MPH) and main-
tain the following condition continuously until “TESTING” has GI
turned to “COMPLETED”. (It will take approximately 30 sec-
onds after “TESTING” shows.)
THROTTLE POSI: 1/8 - 2/8 (at all times during step 4) MA
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
TCC S/V DUTY: More than 94%
VHCL/S SE·A/T: Constant speed of more than 70 km/h (43 EM
MPH)
I Check that “GEAR” shows 4.
I For shift schedule, refer to SDS, AT-344. LC
SAT021J
I If “TESTING” does not appear on CONSULT for a long
time, select “SELF-DIAG RESULTS”. In case a 1st trip DTC
other than P0744 is shown, refer to applicable “TROUBLE EC
DIAGNOSIS FOR DTC”.
5) Make sure that “OK” is displayed. (If “NG” is displayed, refer
to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”.)
FE
Refer to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”, AT-159.
Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
CL
With GST
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
2) Start vehicle with selector lever in D (O/D ON) position and MT
throttle opening 1/8 - 2/8. Check that vehicle runs through gear
shift of D1 , D2 , D3 , D4 , D4 lock-up, in accordance with
shift schedule. Refer to shift schedule, AT-344. AT
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Start engine and warm up ATF.
TF
2) Start vehicle with selector lever in D (O/D ON) position and
throttle opening 1/8 - 2/8. Check that vehicle runs through gear PD
shift of D1 , D2 , D3 , D4 , D4 lock-up, in accordance with
shift schedule. Refer to shift schedule, AT-344.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM. FA
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].
RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-157
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG

Wiring Diagram — AT — TCCSIG NEAT0195

AAT305A

AT-158
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure =NEAT0055 GI


1 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)
During “Cruise test − Part 1”, AT-71.
Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed? MA

EM

LC

EC

SAT988H FE
Yes or No
Yes © I GO TO 11. CL
I And check for proper lock-up.
No © GO TO 2.
MT
2 CHECK LINE PRESSURE
Perform line pressure test. Refer to AT-62. AT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. TF
NG © GO TO 7.

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-159
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK SOLENOID VALVES


1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check solenoid valve assembly operation. Refer to AT-164.

SAT158J

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly.

4 CHECK CONTROL VALVE


1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-289.
2. Check to ensure that:
I Valve, sleeve and plug slide along valve bore under their own weight.
I Valve, sleeve and plug are free from burrs, dents and scratches.
I Control valve springs are free from damage, deformation and fatigue.
I Hydraulic line is free from obstacles.

SAT367H

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair control valve.

AT-160
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

5 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4) GI


Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Yes or No
MA
Yes © GO TO 6.
No © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.
EM
6 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-156. LC
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END EC
NG © I GO TO 11.
I And check for proper lock-up.
FE
7 CHECK LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264. CL
2. Check line pressure solenoid valve operation. Refer to AT-164.

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

SAT158J
ST
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 8. RS
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly.
BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-161
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

8 CHECK CONTROL VALVE


1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-289.
2. Check line pressure circuit valves for sticking.
I Pressure regulator valve
I Pilot valve
I Pressure modifier valve

SAT367H

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 9.
NG © Repair control valve.

9 CHECK SHIFT UP (D3 TO D4)


Does A/T shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 10.
No © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

10 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-156.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © I GO TO 11.
I And check for proper lock-up.

11 CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION


During “Cruise test − Part 1”, AT-71,
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed?
Yes or No
Yes © Perform “Cruise test − Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart.
No © GO TO 12.

12 CHECK TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE


1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve operation.
Refer to AT-164.
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 13.
NG © Replace solenoid valve assembly.

AT-162
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

13 CHECK CONTROL VALVE GI


1. Disassemble control valve assembly. Refer to AT-289.
2. Check control valves for sticking.
I Torque converter clutch control valve MA
I Torque converter clutch relief valve

EM

LC

EC

FE
SAT367H

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 14. CL
NG © Repair control valve
MT
14 CHECK LOCK-UP CONDITION
Does A/T perform lock-up at the specified speed? AT
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 15.
TF
No © Check control valve again. Repair or replace control valve assembly.

PD
15 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-156.
OK or NG
FA
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Perform “Cruise test — Part 1” again and return to the start point of this flow chart. RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-163
DTC P0744 IMPROPER LOCK-UP OPERATION
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0056


SOLENOID VALVES NEAT0056S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check NEAT0056S0101
I Check resistance between terminals (3, 2, 4, 6 or 7) and
ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Shift solenoid valve A 3

Shift solenoid valve B 2 20 - 40Ω

Overrun clutch solenoid valve 4


Ground
Line pressure solenoid valve 6 2.5 - 5Ω

Torque converter clutch sole-


7 10 - 20Ω
noid valve

SAT159J

Operation Check NEAT0056S0102


I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminals (3, 2, 4, 6 or 7) and
ground.

SAT158J

AT-164
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Description

Description NEAT0057
GI
The line pressure solenoid valve regulates the oil pump discharge
pressure to suit the driving condition in response to a signal sent
from the TCM.
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the MA
closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line
pressure duty cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle)
should be open until the closed throttle position switch is EM
“OFF”.
LC
SAT341H

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR


MODE EC
NEAT0057S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item Condition Specification FE


Small throttle opening
(Low line pressure) Approximately 24%
Line pressure solenoid valve CL
" "
duty
Large throttle opening Approximately 95%
(High line pressure)
NOTE: MT
The line pressure duty cycle value is not consistent when the closed throttle position switch is “ON”. To confirm the line pressure duty
cycle at low pressure, the accelerator (throttle) should be open until the closed throttle position switch is “OFF”.
AT
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NEAT0057S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal Judgement TF
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

When releasing accelerator pedal


after warming up engine.
1.5 - 2.5V PD
Line pressure
1 GY/R
solenoid valve When depressing accelerator pedal
0.5V or less
fully after warming up engine. FA
Line pressure When releasing accelerator pedal
5 - 14V
solenoid valve after warming up engine.
2 BR/Y RA
(with dropping When depressing accelerator pedal
resistor) 0.5V or less
fully after warming up engine.
BR
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0057S04

Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)
ST
: L/PRESS SOL/CIRC
TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: P0745 when it tries to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
RS
valve. I Line pressure solenoid valve
: MIL Code No. 1205
BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-165
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE NEAT0057S01
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
SEF895K 1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 sec-
ond.
With GST
1) Turn ignition switch ON.
2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 sec-
ond.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools
1) Turn ignition switch ON.
SAT911I
2) Depress accelerator pedal completely and wait at least 1 sec-
ond.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-166
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV

Wiring Diagram — AT — LPSV NEAT0196 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT306A
IDX

AT-167
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0058

1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.

AAT489A

Is resistance approx. 2.5 - 5Ω?


Yes © GO TO 2.
No © 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Line pressure solenoid valve
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-169.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 4 and TCM harness connector terminal 2.

AAT490A

Is resistance approx. 11.2 - 12.8Ω?


Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Check the following items:
I Dropping resistor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-169.
I Harness for short or open between TCM terminal 2 and terminal cord assembly (Main
harness)

AT-168
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT GI


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Check resistance between terminal 4 and TCM harness connector terminal 1.
MA

EM

LC

AAT491A EC
Is resistance approx. 0Ω?
Yes © GO TO 4. FE
No © Repair or replace harness between TCM terminal 1 and terminal cord assembly.

CL
4 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-166.
MT
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. AT
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
TF

PD

FA

Component Inspection NEAT0059 RA


LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE NEAT0059S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check BR
NEAT0059S0101
I Check resistance between terminal 6 and ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) ST
Line pressure solenoid valve 6 Ground 2.5 - 5Ω
RS
SAT657I

Operation Check NEAT0059S0102 BT


I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 6 and ground.
HA

EL

IDX
SAT658I

AT-169
DTC P0745 LINE PRESSURE SOLENOID VALVE
Component Inspection (Cont’d)
DROPPING RESISTOR NEAT0059S02
I Check resistance between terminals 1 and 2.
Resistance: 11.2 - 12.8Ω

AAT492A

AT-170
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Description

Description NEAT0060
GI
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM
in response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position. MA

EM

LC
SAT341H

Gear position 1 2 3 4 EC
Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)

Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) FE


TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NEAT0060S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values. CL
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard
MT
When shift solenoid valve A oper-
ates. Battery voltage
(When driving in D1 or D4.)
11 L/W
Shift solenoid AT
valve A When shift solenoid valve A does
not operate. 1V or less
(When driving in D2 or D3.) TF
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0060S03
PD
Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)

: SFT SOL A/CIRC FA


TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: P0750 when it tires to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
valve. I Shift solenoid valve A
: MIL Code No. 1108 RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-171
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE NEAT0060S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
SEF895K malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine.
3) Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift
1 , 2 (“GEAR”).
With GST
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D1,D2 position.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
SAT911I
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D1,D2 position.
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

AT-172
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/A NEAT0197 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT604A
IDX

AT-173
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0061

1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
3. Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.

AAT506A

Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω?


Yes © GO TO 2.
No © 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift solenoid valve A
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-175.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 2 and TCM harness connector terminal 11.

AAT507A
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx. 0Ω?
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.

3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-172.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

AT-174
DTC P0750 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0062


GI
SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A NEAT0062S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check MA
NEAT0062S0101
I Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.) EM
Shift solenoid valve A 3 Ground 20 - 40Ω

LC
SAT654I

Operation Check
I
NEAT0062S0102
Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while EC
applying battery voltage to the terminal 3 and ground.
FE

CL

MT
SAT653I

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-175
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Description

Description NEAT0063
Shift solenoid valves A and B are turned “ON” or “OFF” by the TCM
in response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch, vehicle speed and throttle position sensors. Gears will then
be shifted to the optimum position.

SAT341H

Gear position 1 2 3 4

Shift solenoid valve A ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open) ON (Closed)

Shift solenoid valve B ON (Closed) ON (Closed) OFF (Open) OFF (Open)

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NEAT0063S02


Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

When shift solenoid valve B oper-


ates. Battery voltage
Shift solenoid (When driving in D1 or D2.)
12 L/Y
valve B When shift solenoid valve B does
not operate. 1V or less
(When driving in D3 or D4.)

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0063S03

Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)

: SFT SOL B/CIRC


TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: P0755 when it tires to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
valve. I Shift solenoid valve B
: MIL Code No. 1201

AT-176
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Description (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE GI
NEAT0063S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
MA
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
EM
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the LC
SEF895K malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for EC
“ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Drive vehicle in D position and allow the transmission to shift
1 , 2 , 3 (“GEAR”). FE
With GST
1) Start engine. CL
2) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 position.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools MT
SAT911I
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle in D1 , D2 , D3 position.
AT
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”]. TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-177
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B

Wiring Diagram — AT — SSV/B NEAT0198

AAT605A

AT-178
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0064 GI


1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. MA
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and ground.

EM

LC

EC

AAT508A
FE
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω?
Yes © GO TO 2.
CL
No © 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift solenoid valve B MT
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-180.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
AT
2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. TF
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 1 and TCM harness connector terminal 12.
PD

FA

RA

AAT509A
BR
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx. 0Ω? ST
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS

3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-177.
BT
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END HA
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
EL

IDX

AT-179
DTC P0755 SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0065


SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE B NEAT0065S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check NEAT0065S0101
I Check resistance between terminal 2 and ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Shift solenoid valve B 2 Ground 20 - 40Ω

SAT651I

Operation Check NEAT0065S0102


I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 2 and ground.

SAT650I

AT-180
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description

Description NEAT0066
GI
I Throttle position sensor
The throttle position sensor detects the throttle valve position
and sends a signal to the TCM.
MA
I Throttle position switch
Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed
throttle position switch. The wide open position switch sends
a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is open at least 1/2
EM
of the full throttle position. The closed throttle position switch
sends a signal to the TCM when the throttle valve is fully
closed.
LC
AAT495A

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR


MODE EC
NEAT0066S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item Condition Specification FE


Fully-closed throttle Approximately 0.5V
Throttle position sensor
Fully-open throttle Approximately 4V CL
TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NEAT0066S03
Remarks: Specification data are reference values. MT
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard
AT
When releasing accelerator pedal
after warming up engine. [Refer to
Closed throttle “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG- Battery voltage
position switch
TF
16 BR/W NOSIS PROCEDURE (NO
(in throttle posi- TOOLS)”, AT-46]
tion switch)
When depressing accelerator pedal
1V or less
PD
after warming up engine.

When depressing accelerator pedal


more than half-way after warming FA
Wide open
throttle position up engine. [Refer to “Preparation”, Battery voltage
17 OR/B switch “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCE-
(in throttle posi- DURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-46] RA
tion switch) When releasing accelerator pedal
1V or less
after warming up engine.
BR
Throttle position
32 B/W sensor — 4.5 - 5.5V
(Power source) ST
Fully-closed
throttle:
When depressing accelerator pedal Approximately RS
Throttle position slowly after warming up engine. 0.5V
41 OR/L
sensor (Voltage rises gradually in response Fully-open
to throttle position.) throttle: BT
Approximately
4V

Throttle position HA
42 BR sensor — —
(Ground)
EL

IDX

AT-181
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0066S04

Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)

: TP SEN/CIRC A/T I Harness or connectors


TCM receives an excessively low or high (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
: P1705
voltage from the sensor. I Throttle position sensor
: MIL Code No. 1206 I Throttle position switch

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION


PROCEDURE NEAT0066S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
SAT974H malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT.
2) Apply vacuum to the throttle opener, then check the following.
Refer to step 1 and step 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAG-
NOSIS PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-46.
Accelerator pedal
THRTL POS SEN CLOSED THL/SW W/O THRL/P·SW
condition

Fully released Less than 4.7V ON OFF

SAT385J Partially
0.1 - 4.6V OFF OFF
depressed

More than
Fully depressed OFF ON
1.9 - 4.6V

If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,


AT-185.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
3) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT.
4) Start engine and maintain the following conditions for at least
3 consecutive seconds. Then release accelerator pedal com-
SEF895K
pletely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
THRTL POS SEN: Approximately 3V or less
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
If the check result is NG, go to “DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE”,
AT-185.
If the check result is OK, go to following step.
5) Maintain the following conditions for at least 3 consecutive
seconds. Then release accelerator pedal completely.
VHCL SPEED SE: 10 km/h (6 MPH) or more
Accelerator pedal: Wide open throttle
Selector lever: D position (O/D ON)
SAT911I

AT-182
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Description (Cont’d)
With GST
1) Start engine. GI
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D (O/D ON) position, vehicle speed higher
than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the MA
full throttle position and driving for more than 3 seconds.
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
EM
No Tools
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions: LC
Selector lever in D (O/D ON) position, vehicle speed higher
than 10 km/h (6 MPH), throttle opening greater than 1/2 of the
full throttle position and driving for more than 3 seconds. EC
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”]. FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-183
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS

Wiring Diagram — AT — TPS NEAT0199

AAT606A

AT-184
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0067 GI


1 CHECK DTC WITH ECM
Perform diagnostic test mode II (self-diagnostic results) for engine control. Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)”, “ON BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”]. MA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. EM
NG © Check throttle position sensor circuit for engine control. Refer to EC section (“DTC
P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”).
LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-185
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

2 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL


With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “THRTL POS SEN”.

SAT076H
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle:
Approximately 4V

Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 41 and 42 while accelerator pedal is depressed slowly.

AAT474A
Voltage:
Fully-closed throttle valve:
Approximately 0.5V
Fully-open throttle valve:
Approximately 4V
(Voltage rises gradually in response to throttle position.)
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT) © GO TO 3.
OK (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 4.
NG © Check harness for short or open between ECM and TCM regarding throttle position sen-
sor circuit. (Main harness)

AT-186
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT) GI


With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.) MA
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener. Refer to step 1 and step 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCE-
DURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-46. EM
4. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.
LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD
SAT052I

FA

RA
MTBL0011

OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following items:
I Throttle position switch
ST
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-189.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main
harness) RS
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-187
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT)


Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly.
(after warming up engine)
3. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener. Refer to step 1 and step 2 of “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCE-
DURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-46.

AAT497A

MTBL0012

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following items:
I Throttle position switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-189.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main
harness)
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

5 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-182.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

AT-188
DTC P1705 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0205


GI
THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH NEAT00205S01
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle position) NEAT0205S0101
I Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5. MA
[Refer to “Preparation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCE-
DURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-46.]
Accelerator pedal condition Continuity
EM
Released Yes
LC
AAT498A Depressed No

I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC section


(“Basic Inspection”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspec- EC
tion”).
FE

CL

MT

Wide Open Throttle Position Switch


I Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6.
NEAT0205S0102
AT
Accelerator pedal condition Continuity
TF
Released No

Depressed Yes
PD

FA
AAT499A

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-189
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description

Description NEAT0068
The overrun clutch solenoid valve is activated by the TCM in
response to signals sent from the park/neutral position (PNP)
switch, overdrive control switch, vehicle speed and throttle position
sensors. The overrun clutch operation will then be controlled.

SAT341H

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE NEAT0068S02


Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard

When overrun clutch solenoid


Battery voltage
valve operates.
Overrun clutch
20 L/B
solenoid valve
When overrun clutch solenoid
1V or less
valve does not operate.

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0068S03

Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)

: O/R CLTCH SOL/CIRC


TCM detects an improper voltage drop I Harness or connectors
: P1760 when it tries to operate the solenoid (The solenoid circuit is open or shorted.)
valve. I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
: MIL Code No. 1203

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION


PROCEDURE NEAT0068S01
CAUTION:
Always drive vehicle at a safe speed.
NOTE:
If “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION PROCE-
DURE” has been previously conducted, always turn ignition
switch OFF and wait at least 5 seconds before conducting the
next test.
TESTING CONDITION:
SEF895K Always drive vehicle on a level road to improve accuracy of
test.
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“ENGINE” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine.
3) Accelerate vehicle to a speed of more than 10 km/h (6MPH)
in D position (O/D ON).
4) Release accelerator pedal completely in D position (O/D OFF).
SAT911I

AT-190
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Description (Cont’d)
With GST
1) Start engine. GI
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D position, overdrive control switch in OFF
position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH). MA
3) Select “MODE 7” with GST.
No Tools EM
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D position, overdrive control switch in OFF LC
position and vehicle speed higher than 10 km/h (6 MPH).
3) Perform self-diagnosis for ECM.
Refer to EC section [“Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL)”, “ON EC
BOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM DESCRIPTION”].

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-191
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV

Wiring Diagram — AT — OVRCSV NEAT0200

AAT310A

AT-192
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0069 GI


1 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment. MA
3. Check resistance between terminal 3 and ground.

EM

LC

EC

AAT500A
FE
Is resistance approx. 20 - 40Ω?
Yes © GO TO 2.
CL
No © 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve MT
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-194.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open
AT
2 CHECK POWER SOURCE CIRCUIT
1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position. TF
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between terminal 3 and TCM harness connector terminal 20.
PD

FA

RA

AAT501A
BR
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx 0Ω? ST
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
RS

3 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-190.
BT
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END HA
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
EL

IDX

AT-193
DTC P1760 OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0070


OVERRUN CLUTCH SOLENOID VALVE NEAT0070S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
Resistance Check NEAT0070S0101
I Check resistance between terminal 4 and ground.
Solenoid valve Terminal No. Resistance (Approx.)

Overrun clutch solenoid valve 4 Ground 20 - 40Ω

SAT659I

Operation Check NEAT0070S0102


I Check solenoid valve by listening for its operating sound while
applying battery voltage to the terminal 4 and ground.

SAT688I

AT-194
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Description

Description NEAT0172
GI
The A/T fluid temperature sensor detects the A/T fluid temperature
and sends a signal to the TCM.
MA

EM

LC
SAT342HA

EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT021J

CONSULT REFERENCE VALUE IN DATA MONITOR


MODE AT
NEAT0172S02
Remarks: Specification data are reference values.

Monitor item Condition Specification TF


Cold [20°C (68°F)] Approximately 1.5V
A/T fluid temperature sensor " "
Hot [80°C (176°F)] Approximately 0.5V PD

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE


Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
NEAT0172S03
FA
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard RA
When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage
10 W/R Power source When turning ignition switch to
1V or less BR
OFF.

19 W/R Power source Same as No. 10


ST
When turning ignition switch to
Battery voltage
Power source OFF.
28 R/Y (Memory back- or RS
up)
When turning ignition switch to ON. Battery voltage
BT
Throttle position
42 BR sensor — —
(Ground) HA
When ATF temperature is 20°C Approximately
A/T fluid tem- (68°F). 1.5V
47 R/B
perature sensor
EL
When ATF temperature is 80°C Approximately
(176°F). 0.5V
IDX

AT-195
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Description (Cont’d)
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0172S04

Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)

: BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN I Harness or connectors


TCM receives an excessively low or high
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.)
voltage from the sensor.
: 8th judgement flicker I A/T fluid temperature sensor

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION


PROCEDURE NEAT0172S01
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT
1) Start engine.
2) Select “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D position, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h
(12 MPH).
SAT974H

SAT385J

Without CONSULT
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D position, vehicle speed higher than 20 km/h
(12 MPH).
3) Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
AT-46.

SAT335HB

AT-196
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS

Wiring Diagram — AT — BA/FTS NEAT0201 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT311A
IDX

AT-197
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0173

1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE


1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.

AAT476A
Voltage: Battery voltage
3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
4. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28 and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM terminals 10, 19 and 28
(Main harness)
I Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to EL section (“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”).

2 CHECK A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR WITH TERMINAL CORD ASSEMBLY


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect terminal cord assembly connector in engine compartment.
3. Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 when A/T is cold [20°C (68°F)].

AAT502A

Is resistance approx. 2.5kΩ?


Yes © GO TO 3.
No © 1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check the following items:
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-200.
I Harness of terminal cord assembly for short or open

AT-198
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

3 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL OF A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR GI


With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT. MA
3. Read out the value of “FLUID TEMP SE”.

EM

LC

EC

FE
SAT076H
Voltage:
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
CL
Without CONSULT
1. Start engine. MT
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 47 and ground while warming up A/T.

AT

TF

PD
AAT503A
Voltage: FA
Cold [20°C (68°F)] → Hot [80°C (176°F)]:
Approximately 1.5V → 0.5V
OK or NG RA
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Check the following item: BR
I Harness for short or open between TCM and terminal cord assembly (Main harness)

4 CHECK DTC ST
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation Procedure, AT-196.
OK or NG RS
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © I Perform TCM input/output signal inspection. BT
I If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
HA

EL

IDX

AT-199
DTC BATT/FLUID TEMP SEN (A/T FLUID TEMP SENSOR CIRCUIT AND TCM
POWER SOURCE)
Component Inspection

Component Inspection NEAT0174


A/T FLUID TEMPERATURE SENSOR NEAT0174S01
I For removal, refer to AT-264.
I Check resistance between terminals 6 and 7 while changing
temperature as shown at left.
Temperature °C (°F) Resistance

20 (68) Approximately 2.5 kΩ

80 (176) Approximately 0.3 kΩ


AAT485A

AT-200
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Description

Description NEAT0071
GI
The vehicle speed sensor·MTR is built into the speedometer
assembly. The sensor functions as an auxiliary device to the revo-
lution sensor when it is malfunctioning. The TCM will then use a
signal sent from the vehicle speed sensor·MTR. MA

EM

LC
AAT493A

TCM TERMINALS AND REFERENCE VALUE


Remarks: Specification data are reference values.
NEAT0071S02
EC
Terminal Judgement
Wire color Item Condition
No. standard FE
Voltage varies
When moving vehicle at 2 to 3
Vehicle speed between less
40 G/B
sensor
km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or
than 1V and
CL
more.
more than 4.5V

MT
ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0071S03

Check item
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ...
(Possible cause)
AT
: VHCL SPEED SEN·MTR I Harness or connectors
TCM does not receive the proper voltage
signal from the sensor.
(The sensor circuit is open or shorted.) TF
: 2nd judgement flicker I Vehicle speed sensor

PD

FA

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION


PROCEDURE RA
NEAT0071S01
CAUTION:
I Always drive vehicle at a safe speed. BR
I If conducting this “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”
again, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least 5
seconds before continuing. ST
After the repair, perform the following procedure to confirm the
malfunction is eliminated.
With CONSULT RS
SAT974H
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
“A/T” with CONSULT.
2) Start engine and accelerate vehicle from 0 to 25 km/h (0 to 6
BT
MPH).
HA

EL

IDX
SAT385J

AT-201
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Description (Cont’d)
Without CONSULT
1) Start engine.
2) Drive vehicle under the following conditions:
Selector lever in D position and vehicle speed higher than 25
km/h (16 MPH).
3) Perform self-diagnosis.
Refer to TCM SELF-DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE (No Tools),
AT-46.

SAT329H

AT-202
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR

Wiring Diagram — AT — VSSMTR NEAT0202 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT607A
IDX

AT-203
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0072

1 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL.


With CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out the value of “VHCL/S SE·MTR” while driving.
Check the value changes according to driving speed.

SAT076H

Without CONSULT
1. Start engine.
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 40 and ground while driving at 2 to 3 km/h (1 to 2 MPH) for 1 m (3 ft) or more.

AAT504A

Does battery voltage vary between less than 1V and more than 4.5V?
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Check the following items:
I Vehicle speed sensor and ground circuit for vehicle speed sensor Refer to EL section
(“METERS AND GAUGES”).
I Harness for short or open between TCM and vehicle speed sensor (Main harness)

2 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) confirmation procedure, AT-201.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

AT-204
NEAT0206

DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)


Description

Description NEAT0206S01
GI
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
MA

EM

LC
SEC220B

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0206S0101 EC


Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check Items (Possible Cause)

: CONTROL UNIT (RAM) I TCM memory (RAM) or (ROM) is mal- I TCM FE


: CONTROL UNIT (ROM) functioning.

CL

MT

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE CONFIRMATION


PROCEDURE AT
NEAT0206S0102
NOTE:
If “DTC Confirmation Procedure” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least
TF
5 seconds before conducting the next test.
With CONSULT PD
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
A/T with CONSULT.
2) Start engine. FA
SAT974H 3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.

RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT385J

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-205
DTC CONTROL UNIT (RAM), CONTROL UNIT (ROM)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure =NEAT0206S04

1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT.
2. Touch “ERASE”.
3. Perform “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, refer to AT-205.
4. Is the “CONTROL UNIT (RAM)” or “CONTROL UNIT (ROM)” displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes © Replace TCM.
No © INSPECTION END

AT-206
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEPROM)
Description

Description NEAT0208
GI
The TCM consists of a microcomputer and connectors for signal
input and output and for power supply. The unit controls the A/T.
MA

EM

LC
SAT574J

ON BOARD DIAGNOSIS LOGIC NEAT0208S01


EC
Diagnostic trouble code Malfunction is detected when ... Check item (Possible cause)

TCM memory (EEPROM) is malfunction-


: CONTROL UNIT (EEPROM)
ing.
TCM FE

CL

MT

DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION


PROCEDURE AT
NEAT0208S02
NOTE:
If “DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE” has been previously
conducted, always turn ignition switch OFF and wait at least
TF
5 seconds before conducting the next test.
With CONSULT PD
1) Turn ignition switch ON and select “DATA MONITOR” mode for
A/T with CONSULT.
2) Start engine. FA
SAT974H 3) Run engine for at least 2 seconds at idle speed.

RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT385J

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-207
DTC CONTROL UNIT (EEPROM)
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0209

1 INSPECTION START
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch ON and select “SELF DIAG RESULTS” mode for A/T with CONSULT.
2. Move selector lever to R position.
3. Depress accelerator pedal (Full throttle position).
4. Touch “ERASE”.
5. Turn ignition switch OFF for ten seconds.
Perform “DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE (DTC) CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE”, refer to AT-207.
Is the “CONTROL UNIT (EEPROM)” displayed again?
Yes or No
Yes © Replace TCM.
No © INSPECTION END

AT-208
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC

Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC NEAT0203 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

AAT313A
IDX

AT-209
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC (Cont’d)

AAT314A

AT-210
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
Wiring Diagram — AT — NONDTC (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL
AAT608A

IDX

AT-211
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On

1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On NEAT0073


SYMPTOM:
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on for about 2 seconds
when turning ignition switch to ON.
1 CHECK TCM POWER SOURCE
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 10, 19, 28 and ground.

AAT476A
Voltage: Battery voltage
3. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
4. Check voltage between TCM terminal 28
and ground.
Voltage: Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and TCM (Main harness)
I Refer to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-96.
I Ignition switch and fuse
Refer to EL section (“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”).

2 CHECK TCM GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect TCM harness connector.
3. Check resistance between TCM terminals 25, 48 and ground.

AAT477A
If OK, check harness for short to ground and short to power.
Is resistance approx. 0Ω?
Yes © GO TO 3.
No © I Repair open circuit or short to ground or short to power in harness or connectors.
I Refer to “Wiring Diagram — AT — MAIN”, AT-96.

AT-212
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
1. O/D OFF Indicator Lamp Does Not Come On (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LAMP CIRCUIT GI


1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
2. Set overdrive control switch to ON position.
3. Check voltage between TCM terminals 13 and ground. MA

EM

LC

EC
AAT505A

Does battery voltage exist?


FE
Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Check the following items.
I Fuse CL
I O/D OFF indicator lamp
Refer to EL section (“WARNING LAMPS”).
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and O/D OFF indicator lamp (Main MT
harness)
I Refer to EL section (“POWER SUPPLY ROUTING”).
I Harness for short or open between O/D OFF indicator lamp and TCM AT

4 CHECK SYMPTOM
TF
Check again.
OK or NG
PD
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- FA
nector.

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-213
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N Position

2. Engine Cannot Be Started In P and N


Position =NEAT0074
SYMPTOM:
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in P or N position.
Engine cannot be started with selector lever in P. Engine can
be started with selector lever in D, 2, 1 or R position.
1 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?

SAT367J

Yes or No
Yes © Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-99.
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH INSPECTION


Check for short or open of park/neutral position (PNP) switch 2-pin connector. Refer to “Components Inspection”, AT-104.

AAT482A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.

3 CHECK STARTING SYSTEM


Check starting system. Refer to EL section (“System Description”, “STARTING SYSTEM”).
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-214
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or Backward When Pushed

3. In “P” Position, Vehicle Moves Forward Or


GI
Backward When Pushed =NEAT0075
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves when it is pushed forward or backward with MA
selector lever in P position.
1 CHECK PARKING COMPONENTS
EM
Check parking components.
Refer to “Parking Pawl Components”, AT-325.
LC

EC

FE

CL
SAT133B

OK or NG MT
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.
AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-215
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves

4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves =NEAT0076


SYMPTOM:
Vehicle moves forward or backward when selecting N posi-
tion.
1 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?

SAT367J

Yes or No
Yes © Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-99.
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK CONTROL LINKAGE


Check control linkage. Refer to AT-266.

SAT032G

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Adjust control linkage. Refer to AT-266.

AT-216
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
4. In N Position, Vehicle Moves (Cont’d)

3 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL GI


Check A/T fluid level again.

MA

EM

LC

SAT638A
EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. FE
NG © Refill ATF.
CL
4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
MT

AT

TF

PD

SAT171B FA
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. RA
NG © 1. Disassemble A/T.
2. Check the following items:
I Forward clutch assembly BR
I Overrun clutch assembly
I Reverse clutch assembly
ST
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. RS
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END BT
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector. HA

EL

IDX

AT-217
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
5. Large Shock. N → R Position

5. Large Shock. N → R Position =NEAT0077


SYMPTOM:
There is large shock when changing from N to R position.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to A/T fluid temperature sensor, line pressure solenoid valve or throttle position sensor
circuit?

SAT345HA

Yes or No
Yes © Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0710, DTC P0745 or DTC P1705”, AT-108, 168
or 185.
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR


Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC section (“DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”).

AAT495A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

AT-218
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
5. Large Shock. N → R Position (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LINE PRESSURE GI


Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in D position. Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.

MA

EM

LC

SAT494G EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. FE
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot CL
valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
MT
4 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again. AT
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END TF
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector. PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-219
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position

6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R


Position =NEAT0078
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep backward when selecting R position.
1 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
Check A/T fluid level again.

SAT638A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Refill ATF.

2 CHECK STALL TEST


Check stall revolution with selector lever in 1 and R positions.
Refer to AT-344.

SAT493G

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
OK in “1” position, NG in © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-264.
R position 2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot
valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Oil pump assembly
I Torque converter
I Reverse clutch assembly
I High clutch assembly
NG in both 1 and R © GO TO 6.
positions

AT-220
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LINE PRESSURE GI


Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in R position. Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.

MA

EM

LC

SAT494G EC
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4. FE
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot CL
valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T. MT
4. Check the following items:
I Oil pump assembly
AT
4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. TF
2. Check A/T fluid condition.

PD

FA

RA

SAT171B BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5. ST
NG © GO TO 6.

RS
5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
BT
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
HA
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
EL

IDX

AT-221
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position (Cont’d)

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Oil pump assembly
I Torque converter
I Reverse clutch assembly
I High clutch assembly
I Low & reverse brake assembly
I Low one-way clutch
© Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-222
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position

7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1


GI
Position =NEAT0079
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not creep forward when selecting D, 2 or 1 posi- MA
tion.
1 CHECK A/T FLUID LEVEL
EM
Check A/T fluid level again.

LC

EC

FE

SAT638A CL
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2. MT
NG © Refill ATF.

AT
2 CHECK STALL TEST
Check stall revolution with selector lever in D position.
Refer to “STALL TEST”, AT-59. TF

PD

FA

RA

SAT493G BR
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3. ST
NG © GO TO 6.

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-223
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position (Cont’d)

3 CHECK LINE PRESSURE


Check line pressure at idle with selector lever in R position.
Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.

SAT494G

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © 1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot
valve and pilot filter)
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Oil pump assembly

4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION


1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.

SAT171B

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 6.

5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

AT-224
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position (Cont’d)

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM GI


1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE”, AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Valves to control line pressure (Pressure regulator valve, pressure modifier valve, pilot valve and pilot filter) MA
I Line pressure solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items: EM
I Oil pump assembly
I Forward clutch assembly
I Forward one-way clutch
I Low one-way clutch
LC
I Low & reverse brake assembly
I Torque converter
EC
© Repair or replace damaged parts.

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-225
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1

8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 =NEAT0080


SYMPTOM:
Vehicle cannot be started from D1on Cruise test — Part 1.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position”, AT-220.

2 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS


Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle
speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?

SAT934FB

Yes or No
Yes © Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720, DTC P0750, DTC P0755 or VEHICLE
SPEED SENSOR. MTR”, AT-114, 174, 179 or 204.
No © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR


Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC section (“DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”).

AAT495A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

AT-226
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 (Cont’d)

4 CHECK LINE PRESSURE GI


Check line pressure at stall point with selector lever in D position.
Refer to “LINE PRESSURE TEST”, AT-62.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SAT494G

OK or NG
FE
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 8.
CL
5 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION
1. Remove oil pan. MT
2. Check A/T fluid condition.

AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT171B

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6. RA
NG © GO TO 8.
BR
6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. ST
Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve A
RS
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve BT
I Pilot filter
OK or NG HA
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.
EL

IDX

AT-227
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1 (Cont’d)

7 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve assembly.
Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve A
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Forward clutch assembly
I Forward one-way clutch
I Low one-way clutch
I High clutch assembly
I Torque converter
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-228
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2

9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not


GI
Kickdown: D4 → D2 =NEAT0081
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D1 to D2 at the specified speed. MA
A/T does not shift from D4 to D2 when depressing accelerator
pedal fully at the specified speed.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM EM
Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” OK?
Yes or No LC
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot EC
Be Started From D1”, AT-223, 226.

FE
2 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit? CL
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
MT

AT

TF

PD
SAT367J

Yes or No FA
Yes © Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.
No © GO TO 3. RA

3 CHECK VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·A/T AND VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR CIRCUIT BR


Check vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed sensor·MTR circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720 and
VEHICLE SPEED SENSOR·MTR”, AT-114, 204.
OK or NG
ST
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor) and vehicle speed RS
sensor·MTR circuits.

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-229
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 (Cont’d)

4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR


Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC section (“DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”).

AAT495A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

5 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION


1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.

SAT171B

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © GO TO 8.

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve A
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-230
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 → D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 → D2 (Cont’d)

7 CHECK SYMPTOM GI
Check again.
OK or NG
MA
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- EM
nector.

LC
8 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items: EC
I Shift valve A
I Shift solenoid valve A
I Pilot valve FE
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
CL
I Servo piston assembly
I Brake band
I Oil pump assembly
MT
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
AT
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-231
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3

10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 =NEAT0082


SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D2 to D3 at the specified speed.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” OK?
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
No © Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot
Be Started From D1”, AT-223, 226.

2 CHECK PARK NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT


With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?

SAT367J

Yes or No
Yes © Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.
No © GO TO 3.

3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR


Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC section (“DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”).

AAT495A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

AT-232
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 (Cont’d)

4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION GI


1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.
MA

EM

LC

EC
SAT171B

OK or NG FE
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 7.
CL

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-264.
MT
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve B AT
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
TF
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts. PD

6 CHECK SYMPTOM FA
Check again.
OK or NG RA
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
BR
nector.

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-233
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 → D3 (Cont’d)

7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve B
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Servo piston assembly
I High clutch assembly
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-234
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4

11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 =NEAT0083 GI


SYMPTOM:
I A/T does not shift from D3 to D4 at the specified speed.
I A/T must be warm before D3 to D4 shift will occur. MA
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
Are “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1” OK? EM
Yes or No
Yes © GO TO 2.
LC
No © Go to “7. Vehicle Does Not Creep Forward In D, 2 Or 1 Position” and “8. Vehicle Cannot
Be Started From D1”, AT-223, 226.
EC
2 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
With CONSULT FE
Does self-diagnosis, after cruise test, show damage to any of the following circuits?
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
I Overdrive control switch
CL
I A/T fluid temperature sensor
I Revolution sensor
I Shift solenoid valve A or B
I Vehicle speed sensor MT

AT

TF

PD

SAT363HA FA
Yes or No
Yes © Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705, P0710, P0720, P0750, P0755 or VHCL RA
SPEED SEN·MTR”, AT-102, 108, 114, 174, 179 or 204.
No © GO TO 3.
BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-235
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 (Cont’d)

3 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR


Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC section (“DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”).

AAT495A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

4 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION


1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.

SAT171B

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © GO TO 7.

5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Shift valve B
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Shift solenoid valve B
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-236
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
11. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → D4 (Cont’d)

6 CHECK SYMPTOM GI
Check again.
OK or NG
MA
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- EM
nector.

LC
7 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve Assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items: EC
I Shift valve B
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Shift solenoid valve B FE
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
3. Disassemble A/T.
CL
4. Check the following items:
I Servo piston assembly
I Brake band
I Torque converter MT
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.
TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-237
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up

12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up =NEAT0084


SYMPTOM:
A/T does not perform lock-up at the specified speed.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?

SAT346H

Yes or No
Yes © Check torque converter clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to “DTC P0740”, AT-153.
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR


Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC section (“P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”).

AAT495A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check following items:
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Torque converter relief valve
I Torque converter clutch solenoid valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-238
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
12. A/T Does Not Perform Lock-up (Cont’d)

4 CHECK SYMPTOM GI
Check again.
OK or NG
MA
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- EM
nector.

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-239
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition

13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition =NEAT0085


SYMPTOM:
A/T does not hold lock-up condition for more than 30 seconds.
1 CHECK DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to engine speed signal circuit after cruise test?

SAT347H

Yes or No
Yes © Check engine speed signal circuit. Refer to “DTC P0725”, AT-119.
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION


1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.

SAT171B

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © GO TO 5.

3 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-240
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
13. A/T Does Not Hold Lock-up Condition (Cont’d)

4 CHECK SYMPTOM GI
Check again.
OK or NG
MA
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con- EM
nector.

LC
5 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM
1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items: EC
I Torque converter clutch control valve
I Pilot valve
I Pilot filter FE
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check torque converter and oil pump assembly.
OK or NG CL
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts. MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-241
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
14. Lock-up Is Not Released

14. Lock-up Is Not Released =NEAT0086


SYMPTOM:
Lock-up is not released when accelerator pedal is released.
1 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to closed throttle position switch circuit?

SAT367J

Yes or No
Yes © Check closed throttle position switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P1705”, AT-185.
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

AT-242
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3)

15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle


GI
(Light Braking D4 → D3) =NEAT0087
SYMPTOM:
I Engine speed does not smoothly return to idle when A/T MA
shifts from D4 to D3.
I Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when turning
overdrive control switch OFF. EM
I Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting
A/T from D to 2 position.
LC
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit after cruise test?
EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT348H

Yes or No AT
Yes © Check overrun clutch solenoid valve circuit. Refer to “DTC P1760”, AT-193.
No © GO TO 2. TF

2 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR PD


Check throttle position sensor. Refer to EC section (“DTC P0120 THROTTLE POSITION SENSOR”).

FA

RA

BR

ST
AAT495A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
RS
NG © Repair or replace throttle position sensor.
BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-243
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 → D3) (Cont’d)

3 CHECK A/T FLUID CONDITION


1. Remove oil pan.
2. Check A/T fluid condition.

SAT171B

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 4.
NG © GO TO 6.

4 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Overrun clutch reducing valve
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

5 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

6 DETECT MALFUNCTIONING ITEM


1. Remove control valve assembly. Refer to AT-264.
2. Check the following items:
I Overrun clutch control valve
I Overrun clutch reducing valve
I Overrun clutch solenoid valve
3. Disassemble A/T.
4. Check the following items:
I Overrun clutch assembly
I Oil pump assembly
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Repair or replace damaged parts.

AT-244
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1

16. Vehicle Does Not Start From D1 NEAT0088 GI


SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not start from D1 on Cruise test — Part 2.
1 CHECK SELF-DIAGNOSTIC RESULTS MA
Does self-diagnosis show damage to vehicle speed sensor·A/T (revolution sensor), shift solenoid valve A, B or vehicle
speed sensor·MTR after cruise test?
EM

LC

EC

FE

SAT633I
CL
Yes or No
Yes © Check damaged circuit. Refer to “DTC P0720, P0750, P0755 or VHCL SPEED
SEN·MTR”, AT-114, 174, 179 or 204. MT
No © GO TO 2.
AT
2 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.
TF
OK or NG
OK © Go to “8. Vehicle Cannot Be Started From D1”, AT-226.
PD
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.
FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-245
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3, When Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF

17. A/T Does Not Shift: D4 → D3, When


Overdrive Control Switch ON → OFF =NEAT0089
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D4 to D3 when changing overdrive
control switch to OFF position.
1 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to overdrive control switch circuit?

SAT344H

Yes or No
Yes © Check overdrive control switch circuit. Refer to AT-250.
No © Go to “10. A/T Does Not Shift: D2 , D3”, AT-232.

AT-246
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22, When Selector Lever D → 2 Position

18. A/T Does Not Shift: D3 → 22, When Selector


GI
Lever D → 2 Position =NEAT0090
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from D3 to 22 when changing selector lever MA
from D to 2 position.
1 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
EM
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT LC
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?

EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT367J

Yes or No
AT
Yes © Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.
No © Go to “9. A/T Does Not Shift: D1 , D2 Or Does Not Kickdown: D4 , D2”, AT-229.
TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-247
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11, When Selector Lever 2 → 1 Position

19. A/T Does Not Shift: 22 → 11, When Selector


Lever 2 → 1 Position =NEAT0091
SYMPTOM:
A/T does not shift from 22 to 11 when changing selector lever
from 2 to 1 position.
1 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT
With CONSULT
Does “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in Data Monitor show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?
Without CONSULT
Does self-diagnosis show damage to park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit?

SAT367J

Yes or No
Yes © Check park/neutral position (PNP) switch circuit. Refer to “DTC P0705”, AT-102.
No © GO TO 2.

2 CHECK SYMPTOM
Check again.

SAT778B

OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

AT-248
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine Brake

20. Vehicle Does Not Decelerate By Engine


GI
Brake NEAT0092
SYMPTOM:
Vehicle does not decelerate by engine brake when shifting MA
from 22 (12) to 11.
1 CHECK SYMPTOM
EM
Is “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position” OK?
Yes or No
LC
Yes © Go to “15. Engine Speed Does Not Return To Idle (Light Braking D4 , D3)”, AT-243.
No © Go to “6. Vehicle Does Not Creep Backward In R Position”, AT-220.
EC

FE

CL

MT

21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP,


AT
Overdrive Control and Throttle Position
Switches Circuit Checks) NEAT0204
SYMPTOM: TF
O/D OFF indicator lamp does not come on in TCM self-diag-
nostic procedure even the lamp circuit is good.
PD
DESCRIPTION NEAT0204S01
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
The PNP switch assembly includes a transmission range FA
AAT478A switch.
The transmission range switch detects the selector position
and sends a signal to the TCM. RA
I Overdrive control switch
Detects the overdrive control switch position (ON or OFF) and
sends a signal to the TCM. BR
I Throttle position switch
Consists of a wide open throttle position switch and a closed
throttle position switch. ST
The wide open position switch sends a signal to the TCM when
the throttle valve is open at least 1/2 of the full throttle position.
The closed throttle position switch sends a signal to the TCM RS
SAT341I when the throttle valve is fully closed.

BT

HA

EL

IDX
AAT495A

AT-249
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
DIAGNOSTIC PROCEDURE =NEAT0204S03
NOTE:
The diagnostic procedure includes inspections for the overdrive
control and throttle position switch circuits.
1 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT)
With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out P, R, N, D, 2 and 1 position switches moving selector lever to each position. Check the signal of the selector
lever position is indicated properly.

SAT761I

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check the following items:
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-255.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP)
switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main
harness)

AT-250
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

2 CHECK PARK/NEUTRAL POSITION (PNP) SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT) GI


Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.) MA
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 26, 27, 34, 35, 36 and ground while moving selector lever through each posi-
tion.
EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

AAT350A
PD

FA

RA

BR
AAT479A

Does battery voltage exist (B) or non-existent (0)?


Yes © GO TO 3.
ST
No © Check the following items:
I Park/neutral position (PNP) switch RS
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-255.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and park/neutral position (PNP)
switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open between park/neutral position (PNP) switch and TCM (Main
BT
harness)

HA

EL

IDX

AT-251
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

3 CHECK OVERDRIVE CONTROL SWITCH CIRCUIT


With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Read out “OVERDRIVE SWITCH”. Check the signal of the overdrive control switch is indicated properly.
(Overdrive control switch ON displayed on CONSULT means overdrive OFF.)

SAT076H

Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminal 22 and ground when overdrive control switch is ON and OFF.

AAT510A
Voltage:
Switch position ON:
Battery voltage
Switch position OFF:
1V or less
OK or NG
OK (With CONSULT) © GO TO 4.
OK (Without CONSULT) © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following items:
I Overdrive control switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-255.
I Harness for short or open between TCM and overdrive control switch (Main harness)
I Harness for short or open of ground circuit for overdrive control switch (Main harness)

AT-252
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

4 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (With CONSULT) GI


With CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.) MA
2. Select “ECU INPUT SIGNALS” in “DATA MONITOR” mode for “A/T” with CONSULT.
3. Apply vacuum to the throttle opener. Refer to step 1 and step 2 of “Prepatation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCE-
DURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-46. EM
4. Read out “CLOSED THL/SW” and “W/O THRL/P-SW” depressing and releasing accelerator pedal.
Check the signal of throttle position switch is indicated properly.
LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD
SAT052I

FA

RA
MTBL0011

OK or NG BR
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check the following items:
I Throttle position switch
ST
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-256.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main
harness) RS
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-253
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)

5 CHECK THROTTLE POSITION SWITCH CIRCUIT (Without CONSULT)


Without CONSULT
1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between TCM terminals 16, 17 and ground while depressing, and releasing accelerator pedal slowly.
(after warming up engine)
3. Refer to “Prepatation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (NO TOOLS)”, AT-46.

AAT511A

MTBL0012

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Check the following items:
I Throttle position switch
Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-256.
I Harness for short or open between ignition switch and throttle position switch (Main
harness)
I Harness for short or open between throttle position switch and TCM (Main harness)

6 CHECK DTC
Perform Diagnostic procedure, AT-250.
OK or NG
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform TCM input/output signal inspection.
2. If NG, recheck TCM pin terminals for damage or loose connection with harness con-
nector.

AT-254
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
COMPONENT INSPECTION
Overdrive Control Switch
NEAT0204S04
GI
NEAT0204S0401
I Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6.
Continuity: MA
Switch position ON:
No
Switch position OFF: EM
Yes
LC
AAT512A

Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch


1. Check continuity between terminals 1 and 2 and between ter-
NEAT0204S0402
EC
minals 3 and 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 while moving manual shaft through
each position.
FE
Lever position Terminal No.

P 3-4 1-2
CL
R 3-5

N 3-6 1-2
MT
SAT517GB D 3-7

2 3-8
AT
1 3-9

TF

PD

FA
AAT482A

2. If NG, check again with manual control linkage disconnected


from manual shaft of A/T assembly. Refer to step 1. RA
3. If OK on step 2, adjust manual control linkage. Refer to AT-266.
BR

ST

RS
AAT551A

4. If NG on step 2, remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch


from A/T and check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) BT
switch terminals. Refer to step 1.
5. If OK on step 4, adjust park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
Refer to AT-265.
HA
6. If NG on step 4, replace park/neutral position (PNP) switch.
EL

IDX
AAT481A

AT-255
TROUBLE DIAGNOSES FOR SYMPTOMS
21. TCM Self-diagnosis Does Not Activate (PNP, Overdrive Control and Throttle Position Switches Circuit Checks) (Cont’d)
Throttle Position Switch NEAT0204S0403
Closed Throttle Position Switch (Idle Position)
I Check continuity between terminals 4 and 5. Refer to
“Prepatation”, “TCM SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE (NO
TOOLS)”, AT-46.
Accelerator pedal condition Continuity

Released Yes

Depressed No

AAT498A I To adjust closed throttle position switch, refer to EC section


(“Basic Inspection”, “TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS — Basic Inspec-
tion”).

Wide Open Throttle Position Switch


I Check continuity between terminals 5 and 6.
Accelerator pedal condition Continuity

Released No

Depressed Yes

AAT499A

AT-256
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Description

Description NEAT0093 GI
I The mechanical key interlock mechanism also operates as a
shift lock:
With the key switch turned to ON, the selector lever cannot be
shifted from P (parking) to any other position unless the brake MA
pedal is depressed.
With the key removed, the selector lever cannot be shifted
from P to any other position. EM
The key cannot be removed unless the selector lever is placed
in P.
I The shift lock and key interlock mechanisms are controlled by
LC
the ON-OFF operation of the shift lock solenoid and by the
operation of the rotator and slider located inside the key
cylinder, respectively.
EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR
SAT138JA
ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-257
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Wiring Diagram — SHIFT —

Wiring Diagram — SHIFT — NEAT0094

AAT316A

AT-258
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure

Diagnostic Procedure NEAT0095 GI


SYMPTOM 1:
I Selector lever cannot be moved from P position with key
in ON position and brake pedal applied. MA
I Selector lever can be moved from P position with key in
ON position and brake pedal released.
I Selector lever can be moved from P position when key is EM
removed from key cylinder.
SYMPTOM 2:
Ignition key cannot be removed when selector lever is set to LC
P position. It can be removed when selector lever is set to any
position except P.
EC
1 CHECK KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Check key interlock cable for damage.
FE
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 2.
NG © Repair key interlock cable. Refer to “Key Interlock Cable”, AT-262. CL

2 CHECK SELECTOR LEVER POSITION MT


Check selector lever position for damage.
OK or NG AT
OK © GO TO 3.
NG © Check selector lever. Refer to “ON-VEHICLE SERVICE — PNP Switch and Manual Con-
TF
trol Linkage Adjustment”, AT-265 and AT-266.

3 CHECK POWER SOURCE PD


1. Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
2. Check voltage between ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch) harness terminal 1 and ground.
FA

RA

BR

ST
AAT513A

Does battery voltage exist? RS


Yes © GO TO 4.
No © Check the following items: BT
I Harness for short or open between battery and ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake
switch) harness terminal 1
I Fuse
HA
I Ignition switch
Refer to EL section, (POWER SUPPLY ROUTING).
EL

IDX

AT-259
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

4 CHECK INPUT SIGNAL (BRAKE SWITCH)


Turn ignition switch to ON position.
(Do not start engine.)
I Check voltage between A/T device harness terminal 2 and ground.

AAT514A
Voltage:
Brake pedal depressed:
0V
Brake pedal released:
Battery voltage
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 5.
NG © Check the following items:
I Harness for short or open between A/T device harness connector 2 and ASCD brake
switch (shift lock brake switch) harness connector 2
I ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch)
(Refer to “Component Check”, AT-261.)

5 CHECK GROUND CIRCUIT


1. Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
2. Disconnect A/T device harness connector.
3. Check continuity between A/T device harness terminal 1 and ground.

AAT515A

OK or NG
OK © GO TO 6.
NG © Repair harness or connector.

6 CHECK PARK POSITION SWITCH


(Refer to “Component Check”, AT-261.)
OK or NG
OK © GO TO 7.
NG © Replace park position switch.

AT-260
A/T SHIFT LOCK SYSTEM
Diagnostic Procedure (Cont’d)

7 CHECK SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID GI


(Refer to “Component Check”, AT-261.)
OK or NG
MA
OK © GO TO 8.
NG © Replace shift lock solenoid.
EM
8 CHECK SHIFT LOCK OPERATION
1. Reconnect shift lock harness connector. LC
2. Turn ignition switch from OFF to ON” position. (Do not start engine.)
3. Recheck shift lock operation.
OK or NG
EC
OK © INSPECTION END
NG © 1. Perform A/T device input/output signal inspection test. FE
2. If NG, recheck harness connector connection.

CL

MT

Component Check NEAT0096 AT


SHIFT LOCK SOLENOID NEAT0096S01
I Check operation by applying battery voltage between shift lock
solenoid connector terminals 1 and 3. TF

PD

FA
AAT516A

PARK POSITION SWITCH


I Check continuity between A/T device (shift lock solenoid har-
NEAT0096S02
RA
ness connector S1 terminal 1) and A/T device harness connec-
tor M35 terminal 1.
BR
Condition Continuity

When selector lever is set in “P” position and selector


lever button is released
Yes ST
Except above No
RS
AAT517A

ASCD BRAKE SWITCH (SHIFT LOCK BRAKE SWITCH)


NEAT0096S03 BT
I Check continuity between ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake
switch) harness connector terminals 1 and 2.
Condition Continuity HA
When brake pedal is depressed No

When brake pedal is released Yes EL

Check ASCD brake switch (shift lock brake switch) after


adjusting brake pedal — refer to BR section. IDX
AAT518A

AT-261
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Components

Components NEAT0097

SAT352I

CAUTION:
I Install key interlock cable in such a way that it will not be
damaged by sharp bends, twists or interference with adja-
cent parts.
I After installing key interlock cable to control device, make
sure that casing cap and bracket are firmly secured in
their positions. If casing cap can be removed with an
external load of less than 39.2 N (4.0 kg, 8.8 lb), replace
key interlock cable with new one.

Removal NEAT0098
Unlock slider from adjuster holder and remove rod from cable.

SAT353I

AT-262
KEY INTERLOCK CABLE
Installation

Installation NEAT0099
GI
1. Set key interlock cable to steering lock assembly and install
lock plate.
2. Clamp cable to steering column and fix to control cable with MA
band.
3. Set selector lever to P position.
EM

LC
SAT354I

4. Insert interlock rod into adjuster holder.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT355I

5. Install casing cap to bracket.


6. Move slider in order to fix adjuster holder to interlock rod. AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT356I

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-263
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators

Control Valve Assembly and Accumulators NEAT0100


REMOVAL NEAT0100S01
1. Remove exhaust front tube.
2. Remove oil pan and gasket and drain ATF.

SAT359I

3. Remove A/T fluid temperature sensor if necessary.


4. Remove oil strainer.

SAT073BA

5. Remove control valve assembly by removing fixing bolts and


disconnecting harness connector.
Bolt length and location
 mm (in)
Bolt symbol

A 33 (1.30)

B 45 (1.77)

6. Remove solenoids and valves from valve body if necessary.


7. Remove terminal cord assembly if necessary.

SAT353B

8. Remove accumulator A, B, C and D by applying compressed


air if necessary.
I Hold each piston with rag.
9. Reinstall any part removed.
I Always use new sealing parts.

SAT074BA

AT-264
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Revolution Sensor Replacement

Revolution Sensor Replacement NEAT0101


GI
1. Remove rear engine mounting member from side member
while supporting A/T with transfer case with jack. Tighten rear
engine mounting member to the specified torque. Refer to EM
section (“ENGINE REMOVAL”). MA
2. Lower A/T with transfer case as much as possible.
3. Remove revolution sensor from A/T. EM
4. Reinstall any part removed.
I Always use new sealing parts.
LC
AAT565A

Rear Oil Seal Replacement


1. Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF section
NEAT0102
EC
(“Removal”, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”).
2. Remove rear oil seal. FE
3. Install rear oil seal.
I Apply ATF before installing.
4. Reinstall any part removed. CL

MT
SAT035E

Parking Components Inspection NEAT0103 AT


1. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD section (“Removal”,
“PROPELLER SHAFT”).
2. Remove transfer case from vehicle. Refer to TF section TF
(“Removal”, “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”).
3. Remove A/T control cable bracket from transmission case.
PD

FA
AAT564A

4. Support A/T assembly with a jack.


5. Remove adapter case from transmission case. RA
6. Replace parking components if necessary.
7. Reinstall any part removed. BR
I Always use new sealing parts.

ST

RS
SAT078B

Park/Neutral Position (PNP) Switch Adjustment NEAT0104 BT


1. Remove manual control linkage from manual shaft of A/T
assembly.
2. Set manual shaft of A/T assembly in N position. HA
3. Loosen park/neutral position (PNP) switch fixing bolts.
4. Insert pin into adjustment holes in both park/neutral position
(PNP) switch and manual shaft of A/T assembly as near ver- EL
tical as possible.
5. Reinstall any part removed.
6. Check continuity of park/neutral position (PNP) switch. Refer
IDX
SAT081B
to “Components Inspection”, AT-104.
AT-265
ON-VEHICLE SERVICE
Manual Control Linkage Adjustment

Manual Control Linkage Adjustment NEAT0105


Move selector lever from P position to 1 position. You should be
able to feel the detents in each position.
If the detents cannot be felt or the pointer indicating the position is
improperly aligned, the linkage needs adjustment.
1. Place selector lever in P position.
2. Loosen lock nuts.

SAT361I

3. Tighten turn buckle until aligns with inner cable, pulling selec-
tor lever toward R position side without pushing button.
4. Back off turn buckle 1 turn and tighten lock nuts to the speci-
fied torque.
Lock nut:
: 4.4 - 5.9 N·m (0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1 in-lb)
5. Move selector lever from P position to 1 position. Make sure
that selector lever can move smoothly.

SAT032G

AT-266
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal

Removal NEAT0106 GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL
AAT563A

MT
CAUTION:
When removing the A/T assembly from engine, first remove
the crankshaft position sensor (OBD) from the A/T assembly AT
upper side.
Be careful not to damage sensor edge.
1. Remove battery negative terminal. TF
2. Remove exhaust front and rear tubes.
3. Remove fluid charging pipe from A/T assembly.
4. Remove oil cooler pipe from A/T assembly. PD
5. Plug up openings such as the fluid charging pipe hole, etc.
6. Remove propeller shaft. Refer to PD section (“Removal”, FA
“PROPELLER SHAFT”).
7. Remove transfer control linkage from transfer. Refer to TF
section (“Removal” — “REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION”). RA
I Insert plug into rear oil seal after removing rear propeller
shaft.
I Be careful not to damage spline, sleeve yoke and rear oil BR
seal.
8. Remove A/T control cable from A/T assembly.
9. Disconnect A/T and speedometer sensor harness connectors.
ST

RS

10. Remove starter motor.


Tightening torque:
BT
: 41 - 52 N·m (4.2 - 5.3 kg-m, 30 - 38 ft-lb)
11. Remove gusset and rear plate cover securing engine to A/T HA
assembly.
12. Remove bolts securing torque converter to drive plate.
I Remove the bolts by turning crankshaft. EL

IDX
SAT800C

AT-267
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Removal (Cont’d)
13. Support A/T and transfer assembly with a jack.
14. Remove rear engine mounting member from body and A/T
assembly. Tighten rear engine mounting member to the speci-
fied torque. Refer to EM section (“ENGINE REMOVAL”).
15. Remove bolts securing A/T assembly to engine.
16. Lower A/T assembly with transfer.

SAT801C

Installation NEAT0107
I Drive plate runout
Maximum allowable runout:
Refer to EM section (“Inspection”, “CYLINDER
BLOCK”).
If this runout is out of specification, replace drive plate with ring
gear.

SAT977H

I When connecting torque converter to transmission, measure


distance “A” to be certain that they are correctly assembled.
Distance “A”:
26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more

SAT017B

I Install converter to drive plate.


I After converter is installed to drive plate, rotate crankshaft
several turns and check to be sure that transmission
rotates freely without binding.

SAT006G

I Tighten bolts securing transmission.


Tightening torque Bolt length “”
Bolt No.
N·m (kg-m, ft-lb) mm (in)

1 39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36) 47.5 (1.870)

2 39 - 49 (4.0 - 5.0, 29 - 36) 58.0 (2.283)

3 29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29) 25.0 (0.984)

Gusset to engine 29 - 39 (3.0 - 4.0, 22 - 29) 20.0 (0.787)

SAT553H I Reinstall any part removed.

AT-268
REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION
Installation (Cont’d)
I Check fluid level in transmission.
I Move selector lever through all positions to be sure that trans- GI
mission operates correctly.
With parking brake applied, rotate engine at idling. Move selec-
tor lever through N to D, to 2, to 1 and to R positions. A slight MA
shock should be felt by hand gripping selector each time trans-
mission is shifted.
I Perform road test. Refer to “ROAD TEST”, AT-63. EM

LC
SAT638A

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-269
OVERHAUL
Components

Components NEAT0108

SAT147JA

AT-270
OVERHAUL
Components (Cont’d)

GI

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL
AAT558A

IDX

AT-271
OVERHAUL
Oil Channel

Oil Channel NEAT0109

SAT185B

AT-272
OVERHAUL
Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers and Snap Rings

Locations of Needle Bearings, Thrust Washers


GI
and Snap Rings NEAT0110

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX
AAT555A

AT-273
NEAT0111

DISASSEMBLY

1. Drain ATF through drain plug.


2. Remove torque converter by holding it firmly and turning while
pulling straight out.

SAT018B

3. Check torque converter one-way clutch.


a. Insert Tool into spline of one-way clutch inner race.
b. Hook bearing support unitized with one-way clutch outer race
with suitable wire.
c. Check that one-way clutch inner race rotates only clockwise
with Tool while holding bearing support with wire.

SAT521G

4. Remove park/neutral position (PNP) switch from transmission


case.

AAT562A

5. Remove oil pan.


I Always place oil pan straight down so that foreign particles
inside will not move.

SAT754I

6. Place transmission into Tool with the control valve facing up.

SAT522G

AT-274
DISASSEMBLY

7. Check foreign materials in oil pan to help determine cause of


malfunction. If the fluid is very dark, smells burned, or contains GI
foreign particles, the frictional material (clutches, band) may
need replacement. A tacky film that will not wipe clean indi-
cates varnish build up. Varnish can cause valves, servo, and MA
clutches to stick and may inhibit pump pressure.
I If frictional material is detected, replace radiator after
repair of A/T. Refer to LC section (“Radiator”, “ENGINE EM
COOLING SYSTEM”).

LC
SAT171B

8. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and A/T fluid


temperature sensor connectors. EC
I Be careful not to damage connector.
FE

CL

MT
AAT561A

9. Remove oil strainer.


a. Remove oil strainer from control valve assembly. AT
Then remove O-ring from oil strainer.
TF

PD

FA
SAT008B

b. Check oil strainer screen for damage.


RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT025B

10. Remove control valve assembly.


a. Straighten terminal clips to free terminal cords then remove
BT
terminal clips.
HA

EL

IDX
SAT009B

AT-275
DISASSEMBLY

b. Remove bolts A and B, and remove control valve assembly


from transmission.
Bolt symbol Length mm (in)

A 33 (1.30)

B 45 (1.77)

SAT353B

c. Remove solenoid connector.


I Be careful not to damage connector.

SAT026B

d. Remove manual valve from control valve assembly.

SAT127B

11. Remove terminal cord assembly from transmission case while


pushing on stopper.
I Be careful not to damage cord.
I Do not remove terminal cord assembly unless it is dam-
aged.

SAT128B

AT-276
DISASSEMBLY

12. Remove converter housing from transmission case.


I Be careful not to scratch converter housing. GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT999A

13. Remove O-ring from input shaft.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT995A

14. Remove oil pump assembly.


a. Attach Tool to oil pump assembly and extract it evenly from AT
transmission case.
TF

PD

FA
SAT027B

b. Remove O-ring from oil pump assembly.


c. Remove traces of sealant from oil pump housing. RA
I Be careful not to scratch pump housing.
BR

ST

RS
SAT028B

d. Remove needle bearing and thrust washer from oil pump


assembly. BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT108B

AT-277
DISASSEMBLY

15. Remove input shaft and oil pump gasket.

SAT988A

16. Remove brake band and band strut.


a. Loosen lock nut and remove band servo anchor end pin from
transmission case.

SAT029B

b. Remove brake band and band strut from transmission case.

SAT986A

c. Hold brake band in a circular shape with clip.

SAT655

17. Remove front side clutch and gear components.


a. Remove clutch pack (reverse clutch, high clutch and front sun
gear) from transmission case.

SAT030B

AT-278
DISASSEMBLY

b. Remove front bearing race from clutch pack.


c. Remove rear bearing race from clutch pack. GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT113B

d. Remove front planetary carrier from transmission case.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT031B

e. Remove front needle bearing from front planetary carrier.


f. Remove rear bearing from front planetary carrier. AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT968A

g. Remove rear sun gear from transmission case.


RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT974A

18. Remove adapter case.


a. Remove adapter case from transmission case.
BT
b. Remove adapter case gasket from transmission case.
HA

EL

IDX
SAT755I

AT-279
DISASSEMBLY

c. Remove oil seal from adapter case.


I Do not remove oil seal unless it is to be replaced.

SAT756I

d. Remove revolution sensor from adapter case.


e. Remove O-ring from revolution sensor.

SAT757I

19. Remove output shaft and parking gear.


a. Remove rear snap ring from output shaft.

SAT960A

b. Slowly push output shaft all the way forward.


I Do not use excessive force.
c. Remove snap ring from output shaft.

SAT957A

d. Remove output shaft and parking gear as a unit from transmis-


sion case.
e. Remove parking gear from output shaft.

SAT109B

AT-280
DISASSEMBLY

f. Remove needle bearing from transmission case.


GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT033B

20. Remove rear side clutch and gear components.


a. Remove front internal gear. EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT954A

b. Remove bearing race from front internal gear.


AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT110B

c. Remove needle bearing from rear internal gear.


RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT111B

d. Remove rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun


clutch hub as a set from transmission case. BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT951A

AT-281
DISASSEMBLY

e. Remove needle bearing from overrun clutch hub.


f. Remove overrun clutch hub from rear internal gear and for-
ward clutch hub.

SAT148G

g. Remove thrust washer from overrun clutch hub.

SAT036B

h. Remove forward clutch assembly from transmission case.

SAT037B

21. Remove band servo and accumulator components.


a. Remove band servo retainer from transmission case.

SAT038B

b. Apply compressed air to oil hole until band servo piston comes
out of transmission case.
I Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.
c. Remove return springs.

SAT039B

AT-282
DISASSEMBLY

d. Remove springs from accumulator pistons B, C and D.


e. Apply compressed air to each oil hole until piston comes out. GI
I Hold piston with a rag and gradually direct air to oil hole.
Identification of accumulator pistons A B C D MA
Identification of oil holes a b c d

EM

LC
SAT040BA

f. Remove O-ring from each piston.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT523GA

22. Remove manual shaft components, if necessary.


a. Hold width across flats of manual shaft (outside the transmis- AT
sion case) and remove lock nut from shaft.
TF

PD

FA
SAT041B

b. Remove retaining pin from transmission case.


RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT042B

c. While pushing detent spring down, remove manual plate and


parking rod from transmission case. BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT935A

AT-283
DISASSEMBLY

d. Remove manual shaft from transmission case.

SAT043B

e. Remove spacer and detent spring from transmission case.

SAT934A

f. Remove oil seal from transmission case.

SAT044B

AT-284
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump

Oil Pump
GI
COMPONENTS NEAT0112

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

SAT648AB MT

DISASSEMBLY
1.
NEAT0113
Loosen bolts in numerical order and remove oil pump cover. AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT649A

2. Remove rotor, vane rings and vanes.


I Inscribe a mark on back of rotor for identification of fore- RA
aft direction when reassembling rotor. Then remove rotor.
BR

ST

RS
SAT650A

3. While pushing on cam ring remove pivot pin.


I Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.
BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT651A

AT-285
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
4. While holding cam ring and spring lift out cam ring spring.
I Be careful not to damage oil pump housing.
I Hold cam ring spring to prevent it from jumping.

SAT652A

5. Remove cam ring and cam ring spring from oil pump housing.

SAT653A

6. Remove pivot pin from control piston and remove control pis-
ton assembly.

SAT654A

7. Remove oil seal from oil pump housing.


I Be careful not to scratch oil pump housing.

SAT655A

INSPECTION NEAT0114
Oil Pump Cover, Rotor, Vanes, Control Piston, Side
Seals, Cam Ring and Friction Ring NEAT0114S01
I Check for wear or damage.

SAT656A

AT-286
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
Side Clearances
I Measure side clearances between end of oil pump housing
NEAT0114S02
GI
and cam ring, rotor, vanes and control piston. Measure in at
least four places along their circumferences. Maximum mea-
sured values should be within specified positions. MA
I Before measurement, check that friction rings, O-ring,
control piston side seals and cam ring spring are
removed. EM
Standard clearance (Cam ring, rotor, vanes and control
piston):
LC
SAT657A Refer to SDS, AT-348.
I If not within standard clearance, replace oil pump assembly
except oil pump cover assembly. EC
Seal Ring Clearance NEAT0114S03
I Measure clearance between seal ring and ring groove.
FE
Standard clearance:
0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Wear limit: CL
0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within wear limit, replace oil pump cover assembly.
MT
SAT658A

ASSEMBLY
1. Drive oil seal into oil pump housing.
NEAT0115
AT
I Apply ATF to outer periphery and lip surface.
TF

PD

FA
SAT081E

2. Install cam ring in oil pump housing by the following


a. Install side seal on control piston. RA
I Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes toward
control piston. BR
I Apply petroleum jelly to side seal.
b. Install control piston on oil pump.
ST

RS
SAT654A

c. Install O-ring and friction ring on cam ring.


I Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT660A

AT-287
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Oil Pump (Cont’d)
d. Assemble cam ring, cam ring spring and spring seat. Install
spring by pushing it against pump housing.

SAT661A

e. While pushing on cam ring install pivot pin.

SAT651A

3. Install rotor, vanes and vane rings.


I Pay attention to direction of rotor.

SAT662A

4. Install oil pump housing and oil pump cover.


a. Wrap masking tape around splines of oil pump cover assem-
bly to protect seal. Position oil pump cover assembly in oil
pump housing assembly, then remove masking tape.
b. Tighten bolts in a criss-cross pattern.

SAT649A

5. Install new seal rings carefully after packing ring grooves with
petroleum jelly. Press rings down into jelly to a close fit.
I Seal rings come in two different diameters. Check fit care-
fully in each groove.
Small dia. seal ring:
No mark
Large dia. seal ring:
Yellow mark in area shown by arrow
I Do not spread gap of seal ring excessively while install-
ing. It may deform ring.
SAT663A

AT-288
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly

Control Valve Assembly


GI
COMPONENTS NEAT0116

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX
AAT556A

AT-289
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY NEAT0117
1. Remove solenoids.
a. Remove torque converter clutch solenoid valve and side plate
from lower body.
b. Remove O-ring from solenoid.

SAT194B

c. Remove line pressure solenoid valve from upper body.


d. Remove O-ring from solenoid.

SAT667A

e. Remove 3-unit solenoid assembly from upper body.


f. Remove O-rings from solenoids.

SAT043G

2. Disassemble upper and lower bodies.


a. Place upper body facedown, and remove bolts, reamer bolts,
side plate and support plates.
b. Remove lower body and separator plate as a unit from upper
body.
I Be careful not to drop pilot filter, orifice check valve,
spring and steel balls.

SAT195B

c. Place lower body facedown, and remove separator plate.


d. Remove pilot filter, orifice check valve and orifice check spring.

SAT670A

AT-290
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
e. Check to see that steel balls are properly positioned in upper
body. Then remove them from upper body. GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT671A

INSPECTION
Lower and Upper Bodies
NEAT0118
EC
NEAT0118S01
I Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in lower
body. FE

CL

MT
SAT672A

I Check to see that there are pins and retainer plates in upper
body. AT
I Be careful not to lose these parts.
TF

PD

FA
SAT673A

I Check to make sure that oil circuits are clean and free from
damage. RA
I Check tube brackets and tube connectors for damage.
BR

ST

RS
SAT674A

Separator Plate NEAT0118S02 BT


I Make sure that separator plate is free of damage and not
deformed and oil holes are clean.
HA

EL

IDX
SAT675A

AT-291
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
Pilot Filter NEAT0118S03
I Check to make sure that filter is not clogged or damaged.

SAT676A

Torque Converter Clutch Solenoid Valve NEAT0118S04


I Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.
I Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-149.
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve NEAT0118S05
I Check that filter is not clogged or damaged.
I Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-149.

SAT149G

3-Unit Solenoid Assembly (Overrun Clutch Solenoid


Valve and Shift Solenoid Valves A and B) NEAT0118S06
I Measure resistance of each solenoid. Refer to “Component
Inspection”, AT-149.

SAT095B

A/T Fluid Temperature Sensor NEAT0118S07


I Measure resistance. Refer to “Component Inspection”, AT-110.

SAT196BA

ASSEMBLY NEAT0119
1. Install upper and lower bodies.
a. Place oil circuit of upper body face up. Install steel balls in their
proper positions.

SAT671A

AT-292
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
b. Install reamer bolts from bottom of upper body.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT681A

c. Place oil circuit of lower body face up. Install orifice check
spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter. EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT682A

d. Install separator plate on lower body.


e. Install and temporarily tighten support plates, fluid temperature RA
sensor and tube brackets.
BR

ST

RS
SAT197B

f. Temporarily assemble lower and upper bodies, using reamer


bolt as a guide. BT
I Be careful not to dislocate or drop steel balls, orifice
check spring, orifice check valve and pilot filter.
HA

EL

IDX
SAT198B

AT-293
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Assembly (Cont’d)
g. Install and temporarily tighten bolts and tube brackets in their
proper locations.
Bolt length and location:
Bolt symbol a b c d

Bolt length mm (in) 70 (2.76) 50 (1.97) 33 (1.30) 27 (1.06)

SAT199BA

2. Install solenoids.
a. Attach O-ring and install torque converter clutch solenoid valve
and side plates onto lower body.

SAT200B

b. Attach O-rings and install 3-unit solenoids assembly onto


upper body.
c. Attach O-ring and install line pressure solenoid valve onto
upper body.
3. Tighten all bolts.

SAT150G

AT-294
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body

Control Valve Upper Body


GI
COMPONENTS NEAT0120

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA
SAT142J

EL
Apply ATF to all components before their installation.
Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS on page AT-345.
IDX

AT-295
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY NEAT0121
1. Remove valves at parallel pins.
I Do not use a magnetic hand.

SAT834A

a. Use a wire paper clip to push out parallel pins.

SAT822A

b. Remove parallel pins while pressing their corresponding plugs


and sleeves.
I Remove plug slowly to prevent internal parts from jump-
ing out.

SAT823A

c. Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal


parts.
I If a valve is hard to remove, place valve body facedown
and lightly tap it with a soft hammer.
I Be careful not to drop or damage valves and sleeves.

SAT824A

2. Remove valves at retainer plates.


a. Pry out retainer plate with wire paper clip.

SAT825A

AT-296
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
b. Remove retainer plates while holding spring.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT826A

c. Place mating surface of valve facedown, and remove internal


parts. EC
I If a valve is hard to remove, lightly tap valve body with a
soft hammer.
I Be careful not to drop or damage valves, sleeves, etc. FE

CL

MT
SAT827A

I 4-2 sequence valve and relay valve are located far back in
upper body. If they are hard to remove, carefully push them out AT
using stiff wire.
I Be careful not to scratch sliding surface of valve with wire.
TF

PD

FA
SAT828A

INSPECTION NEAT0122
RA
Valve Springs NEAT0122S01
I Measure free length and outer diameter of each valve spring.
Also check for damage or deformation. BR
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-345.
I Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. ST
Control Valves NEAT0122S02
I Check sliding surfaces of valves, sleeves and plugs. RS
SAT829A

ASSEMBLY NEAT0123 BT
1. Lubricate the control valve body and all valves with ATF. Install
control valves by sliding them carefully into their bores.
I Be careful not to scratch or damage valve body. HA

EL

IDX
SAT830A

AT-297
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
I Wrap a small screwdriver with vinyl tape and use it to insert the
valves into proper position.

SAT831A

Pressure regulator valve


I If pressure regulator plug is not centered properly, sleeve can-
not be inserted into bore in upper body. If this happens, use
vinyl tape wrapped screwdriver to center sleeve until it can be
inserted.
I Turn sleeve slightly while installing.

SAT832A

Accumulator control plug


I Align protrusion of accumulator control sleeve with notch in
plug.
I Align parallel pin groove in plug with parallel pin, and install
accumulator control valve.

SAT833A

2. Install parallel pins and retainer plates.

SAT834A

I While pushing plug, install parallel pin.

SAT823A

AT-298
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Upper Body (Cont’d)
4-2 sequence valve and relay valve
I Push 4-2 sequence valve and relay valve with wire wrapped in GI
vinyl tape to prevent scratching valve body. Install parallel pins.

MA

EM

LC
SAT835A

I Insert retainer plate while pushing spring.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT836A

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-299
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Lower Body

Control Valve Lower Body


COMPONENTS NEAT0124

SAT966I

Apply ATF to all components before their installation.


Numbers preceding valve springs correspond with those shown in SDS on page AT-345.

AT-300
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Control Valve Lower Body (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY
1. Remove valves at parallel pins.
NEAT0125
GI
2. Remove valves at retainer plates.
For removal procedures, refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of Control
Valve Upper Body. MA

EM

LC
SAT838A

INSPECTION
Valve Springs
NEAT0126
EC
NEAT0126S01
I Check each valve spring for damage or deformation. Also
measure free length and outer diameter. FE
Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-345.
I Replace valve springs if deformed or fatigued. CL
Control Valves NEAT0126S02
I Check sliding surfaces of control valves, sleeves and plugs for MT
SAT829A damage.
ASSEMBLY
I Install control valves.
NEAT0127
AT
For installation procedures, refer to “ASSEMBLY” of Control
Valve Upper Body, AT-297.
TF

PD

FA
SAT838A

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-301
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch

Reverse Clutch
COMPONENTS NEAT0128

SAT143J

DISASSEMBLY NEAT0129
1. Check operation of reverse clutch.
a. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.
Apply compressed air to oil hole.
b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
c. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,
I D-ring might be damaged.
I Oil seal might be damaged.
I Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
SAT841A

2. Remove drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate, dish plate


and snap ring.

SAT842A

AT-302
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
3. Remove snap ring from clutch drum while compressing clutch
springs. GI
I Do not expand snap ring excessively.
4. Remove spring retainer and return spring.
MA

EM

LC
SAT524G

5. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch
drum. While holding piston, gradually apply compressed air to EC
oil hole until piston is removed.
I Do not apply compressed air abruptly.
6. Remove D-ring and oil seal from piston. FE

CL

MT
SAT844A

INSPECTION
Reverse Clutch Snap Ring and Spring Retainer
NEAT0130
AT
NEAT0130S01
I Check for deformation, fatigue or damage.
TF

PD

FA

Reverse Clutch Return Springs


I Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length
NEAT0130S02
RA
and outside diameter.
Inspection standard: BR
Refer to SDS, AT-345.

ST

RS
SAT829A

Reverse Clutch Drive Plates NEAT0130S03 BT


I Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
I Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate: HA
Standard value: 1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)
Wear limit: 1.80 mm (0.0709 in)
I If not within wear limit, replace. EL
Reverse Clutch Dish Plate NEAT0130S04
I Check for deformation or damage. IDX
SAT845A

AT-303
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
Reverse Clutch Piston NEAT0130S05
I Shake piston to assure that balls are not seized.
I Apply compressed air to check ball oil hole opposite the return
spring. Make sure there is no air leakage.
I Also apply compressed air to oil hole on return spring side to
assure that air leaks past ball.

SAT846A

ASSEMBLY NEAT0131
1. Install D-ring and oil seal on piston.
I Apply ATF to both parts.

SAT847A

2. Install piston assembly by turning it slowly and evenly.


I Apply ATF to inner surface of drum.

SAT848A

3. Install return springs and spring retainer.

SAT849A

4. Install snap ring while compressing clutch springs.

SAT524G

AT-304
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Reverse Clutch (Cont’d)
I Do not align snap ring gap with spring retainer stopper.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT850A

5. Install drive plates, driven plates, retaining plate and dish plate.
6. Install snap ring. EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT842A

7. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring. If


not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. AT
Specified clearance:
Standard
TF
0.5 - 0.8 mm (0.020 - 0.031 in)
Allowable limit
1.2 mm (0.047 in) PD
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-346.
FA
SAT852A

8. Check operation of reverse clutch.


Refer to “DISASSEMBLY” of Reverse Clutch, AT-302. RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT841A

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-305
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
High Clutch

High Clutch
COMPONENTS NEAT0132

SAT144J

DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY NEAT0133


Service procedures for high clutch are essentially the same as
those for reverse clutch, with the following exception:

SAT853A

I Check of high clutch operation

SAT854A

AT-306
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
High Clutch (Cont’d)
I Removal and installation of return spring
GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT525G

I Inspection of high clutch return springs


Inspection standard: EC
Refer to SDS, AT-345.
FE

CL

MT
SAT829A

I Inspection of high clutch drive plate


Thickness of drive plate: AT
Standard
1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in) TF
Wear limit
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
PD

FA
SAT845A

I Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap


ring RA
Specified clearance:
Standard BR
1.8 - 2.2 mm (0.071 - 0.087 in)
Allowable limit
2.8 mm (0.110 in) ST
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-346.
RS
SAT858A

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-307
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches

Forward and Overrun Clutches


COMPONENTS NEAT0134

AAT560A

AT-308
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)
DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
Forward and overrun clutches are serviced essentially the same
NEAT0135
GI
way as reverse clutch is serviced. However, note the following
exceptions.
I Check of forward clutch operation MA

EM

LC
SAT860A

I Check of overrun clutch operation


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT861A

I Removal of forward clutch drum


Remove forward clutch drum from transmission case by hold- AT
ing snap ring.

TF

PD

FA
SAT865A

I Removal of forward clutch and overrun clutch pistons


a) While holding overrun clutch piston, gradually apply com- RA
pressed air to oil hole.
BR

ST

RS
SAT862A

b) Remove overrun clutch from forward clutch.


BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT863A

AT-309
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)
I Removal and installation of return springs

SAT526G

I Inspection of forward clutch and overrun clutch return springs


Inspection standard:
Refer to SDS, AT-345.

SAT829A

I Inspection of forward clutch drive plates


Thickness of drive plate:
Standard
1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)

SAT845A

I Inspection of overrun clutch drive plates


Thickness of drive plate:
Standard
1.90 - 2.05 mm (0.0748 - 0.0807 in)
Wear limit
1.80 mm (0.0709 in)

SAT845A

I Installation of forward clutch piston and overrun clutch piston


a) Install forward clutch piston by turning it slowly and evenly.
I Apply ATF to inner surface of clutch drum.

SAT866A

AT-310
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward and Overrun Clutches (Cont’d)
I Align notch in forward clutch piston with groove in for-
ward clutch drum. GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT867A

b) Install overrun clutch by turning it slowly and evenly.


I Apply ATF to inner surface of forward clutch piston. EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT868A

I Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap


ring of overrun clutch AT
Specified clearance:
Standard
TF
1.0 - 1.4 mm (0.039 - 0.055 in)
Allowable limit
2.0 mm (0.079 in) PD
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-347.
FA
SAT869A

I Measurement of clearance between retaining plate and snap


ring of forward clutch RA
Specified clearance:
Standard BR
0.35 - 0.75 mm (0.0138 - 0.0295 in)
Allowable limit
1.85 mm (0.0728 in) ST
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-347.
RS
SAT870A

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-311
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake

Low & Reverse Brake


COMPONENTS NEAT0136

AAT557A

DISASSEMBLY NEAT0137
1. Check operation of low and reverse brake.
a. Install seal ring onto oil pump cover and install reverse clutch.
Apply compressed air to oil hole.
b. Check to see that retaining plate moves to snap ring.
c. If retaining plate does not contact snap ring,
I D-ring might be damaged.
I Oil seal might be damaged.
I Fluid might be leaking past piston check ball.
SAT872A

2. Remove snap ring, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven
plates and dish plate.

SAT873A

AT-312
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
3. Remove low one-way clutch inner race, spring retainer and
return spring from transmission case. GI
4. Remove seal rings from low one-way clutch inner race.
5. Remove needle bearing from low one-way clutch inner race.
MA

EM

LC
SAT382I

6. Remove low and reverse brake piston using compressed air.


7. Remove oil seal and D-ring from piston. EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT876A

INSPECTION NEAT0138
Low and Reverse Brake Snap Ring and Spring Retainer AT
NEAT0138S01
I Check for deformation, or damage.
TF

PD

FA

Low and Reverse Brake Return Springs


I
NEAT0138S02
Check for deformation or damage. Also measure free length
RA
and outside diameter.
Inspection standard: BR
Refer to SDS, AT-345.

ST

RS
SAT829A

Low and Reverse Brake Drive Plates NEAT0138S03 BT


I Check facing for burns, cracks or damage.
I Measure thickness of facing.
Thickness of drive plate: HA
Standard value
1.52 - 1.67 mm (0.0598 - 0.0657 in)
Wear limit EL
1.40 mm (0.0551 in)
I If not within wear limit, replace. IDX
SAT845A

AT-313
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
Low One-way Clutch Inner Race NEAT0138S04
I Check frictional surface of inner race for wear or damage.

SAT877A

I Install a new seal rings onto low one-way clutch inner race.
I Be careful not to expand seal ring gap excessively.
I Measure seal ring-to-groove clearance.
Inspection standard:
Standard value: 0.10 - 0.25 mm (0.0039 - 0.0098 in)
Allowable limit: 0.25 mm (0.0098 in)
I If not within allowable limit, replace low one-way clutch inner
race.

SAT878A

ASSEMBLY NEAT0139
1. Install needle bearing onto one-way clutch inner race.
I Pay attention to its direction — Black surface goes to rear
side.
I Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT112B

2. Install oil seal and D-ring onto piston.


I Apply ATF to oil seal and D-ring.

SAT879A

3. Install piston by rotating it slowly and evenly.


I Apply ATF to inner surface of transmission case.

SAT880A

AT-314
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Low & Reverse Brake (Cont’d)
4. Install return springs, spring retainer and low one-way clutch
inner race onto transmission case. GI
5. Install dish plate, low and reverse brake drive plates, driven
plates and retaining plate.
6. Install snap ring on transmission case. MA

EM

LC
SAT881A

7. Check operation of low and reverse brake clutch piston. Refer


to “DISASSEMBLY”, AT-312. EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT872A

8. Measure clearance between retaining plate and snap ring.


If not within allowable limit, select proper retaining plate. AT
Specified clearance:
Standard
TF
0.8 - 1.1 mm (0.031 - 0.043 in)
Allowable limit
2.3 mm (0.091 in) PD
Retaining plate:
Refer to SDS, AT-348.
FA
SAT885A

9. Install low one-way clutch inner race seal ring.


I Apply petroleum jelly to seal ring. RA
I Make sure seal rings are pressed firmly into place and
held by petroleum jelly. BR

ST

RS
SAT884A

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-315
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly

Forward Clutch Drum Assembly


COMPONENTS NEAT0140

SAT211GA

DISASSEMBLY NEAT0141
1. Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.
2. Remove side plate from forward clutch drum.

SAT212G

3. Remove low one-way clutch from forward clutch drum.


4. Remove snap ring from forward clutch drum.

SAT213G

5. Remove needle bearing from forward clutch drum.

SAT891A

AT-316
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly (Cont’d)
INSPECTION
Forward Clutch Drum
NEAT0142
GI
NEAT0142S01
I Check spline portion for wear or damage.
I Check frictional surfaces of low one-way clutch and needle MA
bearing for wear or damage.

EM

LC
SAT892A

Needle Bearing and Low One-way Clutch


I Check frictional surface for wear or damage.
NEAT0142S02
EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT893A

ASSEMBLY
1. Install needle bearing in forward clutch drum.
NEAT0143
AT
2. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.
TF

PD

FA
SAT214G

3. Install low one-way clutch onto forward clutch drum by push-


ing the roller in evenly. RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT894A

I Install low one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.


BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT895A

AT-317
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Forward Clutch Drum Assembly (Cont’d)
4. Install side plate onto forward clutch drum.
5. Install snap ring onto forward clutch drum.

SAT887A

Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub


COMPONENTS NEAT0144

SAT896AA

DISASSEMBLY NEAT0145
1. Remove rear internal gear by pushing forward clutch hub for-
ward.

SAT897A

2. Remove thrust washer from rear internal gear.

SAT898A

AT-318
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
3. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT899A

4. Remove end bearing.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT900A

5. Remove forward one-way clutch and end bearing as a unit


from forward clutch hub. AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT955A

6. Remove snap ring from forward clutch hub.


RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT901A

INSPECTION NEAT0146 BT
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub NEAT0146S01
I Check gear for excessive wear, chips or cracks.
I Check frictional surfaces of forward one-way clutch and thrust HA
washer for wear or damage.
I Check spline for wear or damage.
EL

IDX
SAT902A

AT-319
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
Snap Ring and End Bearing NEAT0146S02
I Check for deformation or damage.
ASSEMBLY NEAT0147
1. Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.

SAT903A

2. Install end bearing.

SAT901A

3. Install forward one-way clutch onto clutch hub.


I Install forward one-way clutch with flange facing rearward.
4. Install end bearing.
5. Install snap ring onto forward clutch hub.

SAT904A

6. Install thrust washer onto rear internal gear.


I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.
I Securely insert pawls of thrust washer into holes in rear
internal gear.

SAT906A

7. Position forward clutch hub in rear internal gear.

SAT907A

AT-320
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Rear Internal Gear and Forward Clutch Hub (Cont’d)
8. After installing, check to assure that forward clutch hub rotates
clockwise. GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT905A

Band Servo Piston Assembly


EC
COMPONENTS NEAT0148

FE

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

SAT908AC FA

DISASSEMBLY
1. Block one oil hole in OD servo piston retainer and the center
NEAT0149
RA
hole in OD band servo piston.
2. Apply compressed air to the other oil hole in piston retainer to BR
remove OD band servo piston from retainer.
3. Remove D-ring from OD band servo piston.
ST

RS
SAT909A

4. Remove band servo piston assembly from servo piston


retainer by pushing it forward. BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT910A

AT-321
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
5. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing
servo piston spring retainer down, remove E-ring.

SAT911A

6. Remove servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and pis-


ton stem from band servo piston.

SAT912A

7. Remove E-ring from band servo piston.

SAT913A

8. Remove servo cushion spring retainer from band servo piston.


9. Remove D-rings from band servo piston.
10. Remove O-rings from servo piston retainer.

SAT914A

INSPECTION NEAT0150
Pistons, Retainers and Piston Stem NEAT0150S01
I Check frictional surfaces for abnormal wear or damage.

SAT915A

AT-322
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
Return Springs
I Check for deformation or damage. Measure free length and
NEAT0150S02
GI
outer diameter.
Inspection standard:
MA
Refer to SDS, AT-345.

EM

LC
SAT916AA

ASSEMBLY
1. Install O-rings onto servo piston retainer.
NEAT0151
EC
I Apply ATF to O-rings.
I Pay attention to position of each O-ring. FE

CL

MT
SAT917A

2. Install servo cushion spring retainer onto band servo piston.


AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT918A

3. Install E-ring onto servo cushion spring retainer.


RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT919A

4. Install D-rings onto band servo piston.


I Apply ATF to D-rings.
BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT920A

AT-323
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Band Servo Piston Assembly (Cont’d)
5. Install servo piston spring retainer, return spring C and piston
stem onto band servo piston.

SAT912A

6. Place piston stem end on a wooden block. While pushing


servo piston spring retainer down, install E-ring.

SAT921A

7. Install band servo piston assembly onto servo piston retainer


by pushing it inward.

SAT922A

8. Install D-ring on OD band servo piston.


I Apply ATF to D-ring.

SAT923A

9. Install OD band servo piston onto servo piston retainer by


pushing it inward.

SAT924A

AT-324
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Parking Pawl Components

Parking Pawl Components


GI
COMPONENTS NEAT0152

MA

EM

LC

EC

FE

CL

SAT758I MT

DISASSEMBLY
1. Slide return spring to the front of adapter case flange.
NEAT0153
AT
2. Remove return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl from
adapter case. TF
3. Remove parking pawl shaft from adapter case.

PD

FA
SAT226H

4. Remove parking actuator support from adapter case.


RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT228H

ASSEMBLY NEAT0154 BT
1. Install parking actuator support onto adapter case.
2. Insert parking pawl shaft into adapter case.
3. Install return spring, pawl spacer and parking pawl onto park- HA
ing pawl shaft.

EL

IDX
SAT229H

AT-325
REPAIR FOR COMPONENT PARTS
Parking Pawl Components (Cont’d)
4. Bend return spring upward and install it onto adapter case.

SAT226H

AT-326
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1)

Assembly (1) NEAT0155


GI
1. Install manual shaft components.
a. Install oil seal onto manual shaft.
I Apply ATF to oil seal. MA
I Wrap threads of manual shaft with masking tape.
b. Insert manual shaft and oil seal as a unit into transmission
case. EM
c. Remove masking tape.

LC
SAT931A

d. Push oil seal evenly and install it onto transmission case.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT932A

e. Align groove in shaft with drive pin hole, then drive pin into
position as shown in figure at left. AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT933A

f. Install detent spring and spacer.


g. While pushing detent spring down, install manual plate onto RA
manual shaft.
BR

ST

RS
SAT901E

h. Install lock nuts onto manual shaft.


BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT936A

AT-327
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
2. Install accumulator piston.
a. Install O-rings onto accumulator piston.
I Apply ATF to O-rings.
Accumulator piston O-rings
Unit: mm (in)

Accumulator A B C D

Small diameter end 29 (1.14) 32 (1.26) 45 (1.77) 29 (1.14)

Large diameter end 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 45 (1.77)

SAT523GA

b. Install return spring for accumulator A onto transmission case.


Free length of return spring:
Refer to SDS, AT-345.

SAT938A

c. Install accumulator pistons A, B, C and D.


I Apply ATF to transmission case.

SAT939AA

3. Install band servo piston.


a. Install return springs onto servo piston.

SAT941A

b. Install band servo piston onto transmission case.


I Apply ATF to O-ring of band servo piston and transmis-
sion case.
c. Install gasket for band servo onto transmission case.

SAT942A

AT-328
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
d. Install band servo retainer onto transmission case.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT940A

4. Install rear side clutch and gear components.


a. Place transmission case in vertical position. EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT943A

b. Slightly lift forward clutch drum assembly. Then slowly rotate it


clockwise until its hub passes fully over clutch inner race inside AT
transmission case.

TF

PD

FA
SAT944A

c. Check to be sure that rotation direction of forward clutch


assembly is correct. RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT945A

d. Install thrust washer onto front of overrun clutch hub.


I Apply petroleum jelly to the thrust washer.
BT
I Insert pawls of thrust washer securely into holes in over-
run clutch hub. HA

EL

IDX
SAT946A

AT-329
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
e. Install overrun clutch hub onto rear internal gear assembly.

SAT947A

f. Install needle bearing onto rear of overrun clutch hub.


I Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT948A

g. Check that overrun clutch hub rotates as shown while holding


forward clutch hub.

SAT949A

h. Place transmission case into horizontal position.

SAT527G

i. Install rear internal gear, forward clutch hub and overrun clutch
hub as a unit onto transmission case.

SAT951A

AT-330
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
j. Install needle bearing onto rear internal gear.
I Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing. GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT952A

k. Install bearing race onto rear of front internal gear.


I Apply petroleum jelly to bearing race. EC
I Securely engage pawls of bearing race with holes in front
internal gear.
FE

CL

MT
SAT953A

l. Install front internal gear on transmission case.


AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT954A

5. Install output shaft and parking gear.


a. Insert output shaft from rear of transmission case while slightly RA
lifting front internal gear.
I Do not force output shaft against front of transmission BR
case.

ST

RS
SAT216B

b. Carefully push output shaft against front of transmission case.


Install snap ring on front of output shaft. BT
I Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in rear
direction.
HA

EL

IDX
SAT957A

AT-331
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
c. Install needle bearing on transmission case.
I Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to rear.
I Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.

SAT217B

d. Install parking gear on transmission case.

SAT218B

e. Install snap ring on rear of output shaft.


I Check to be sure output shaft cannot be removed in for-
ward direction.

SAT960A

6. Install adapter case.


a. Install oil seal on adapter case.
I Apply ATF to oil seal.

SAT759I

b. Install O-ring on revolution sensor.


I Apply ATF to O-ring.
c. Install revolution sensor on adapter case.

SAT757I

AT-332
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
d. Install rear extension gasket on transmission case.
GI

MA

EM

LC
SAT963A

e. Install parking rod on transmission case.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT964A

f. Install rear extension or adapter case on transmission case.


AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT755I

7. Install front side clutch and gear components.


a. Install rear sun gear on transmission case. RA
I Pay attention to its direction.
BR

ST

RS
SAT974A

b. Make sure needle bearing is on front of front planetary carrier.


I Apply petroleum jelly to needle bearing.
BT
c. Make sure needle bearing is on rear of front planetary carrier.
I Apply petroleum jelly to bearing. HA
I Pay attention to its direction — Black side goes to front.

EL

IDX
SAT967A

AT-333
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (1) (Cont’d)
d. While rotating forward clutch drum clockwise, install front plan-
etary carrier on forward clutch drum.

SAT969A

I Check that portion A of front planetary carrier protrudes


approximately 2 mm (0.08 in) beyond portion B of forward
clutch assembly.

SAT970A

e. Make sure bearing races are on front and rear of clutch pack.
I Apply petroleum jelly to bearing races.
I Securely engage pawls of bearing races with holes in
clutch pack.

SAT971A

f. Install clutch pack into transmission case.

SAT973A

Adjustment NEAT0156
When any parts listed in the following table are replaced, total end
play or reverse clutch end play must be adjusted.
Part name Total end play Reverse clutch end play

Transmission case I I

Low one-way clutch inner race I I

Overrun clutch hub I I

Rear internal gear I I

AT-334
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment (Cont’d)

Part name Total end play Reverse clutch end play GI


Rear planetary carrier I I

Rear sun gear I I


MA
Front planetary carrier I I

Front sun gear I I EM


High clutch hub I I

High clutch drum I I LC


Oil pump cover I I

Reverse clutch drum — I EC

FE

CL

MT

1. Adjust total end play.


Total end play “T1”: AT
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
TF

PD

FA
SAT975A

a. With needle bearing installed, place J34291-1 (bridge),


J34291-2 (legs) and the J34291-5 (gauging cylinder) onto oil RA
pump. The long ends of legs should be placed firmly on
machined surface of oil pump assembly. The gauging cylinder
should rest on top of the needle bearing. Lock gauging cylin- BR
der in place with set screw.

ST

RS
SAT976A

b. Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.


BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT977A

AT-335
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment (Cont’d)
c. Install original bearing race inside reverse clutch drum. Place
shim selecting gauge with its legs on machined surface of
transmission case (no gasket). Allow gauging plunger to rest
on bearing race. Lock gauging plunger in place with set screw.

SAT978A

d. Remove Tool and use feeler gauge to measure gap between


gauging cylinder and gauging plunger. This measurement
should give exact total end play.
Total end play “T1”:
0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)
I If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thick-
ness of oil pump cover bearing race as necessary.
Available oil pump cover bearing race:
Refer to SDS, AT-348.

SAT979A

2. Adjust reverse clutch drum end play.


Reverse clutch drum end play “T2”:
0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)

SAT980A

a. Place J34291-1 (bridge), J34291-2 (legs) and J34291-5 (gaug-


ing cylinder) on machined surface of transmission case (no
gasket). Allow gauging cylinder to rest on front thrust surface
of reverse clutch drum. Lock cylinder in place with set screw.

SAT981A

b. Install J34291-23 (gauging plunger) into gauging cylinder.

SAT982AA

AT-336
ASSEMBLY
Adjustment (Cont’d)
c. Install original thrust washer on oil pump. Place shim setting
gauge legs onto machined surface of oil pump assembly. Allow GI
gauging plunger to rest on thrust washer. Lock plunger in place
with set screw.
MA

EM

LC
SAT983A

d. Use feeler gauge to measure gap between gauging plunger


and gauging cylinder. This measurement should give you exact EC
reverse clutch drum end play.
Reverse clutch drum end play “T2”:
0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in) FE
I If end play is out of specification, decrease or increase thick-
ness of oil pump thrust washer as necessary.
CL
Available oil pump thrust washer:
Refer to SDS, AT-349.
MT
SAT984A

Assembly (2) NEAT0157 AT


1. Install brake band and band strut.
a. Install band strut on brake band.
I Apply petroleum jelly to band strut. TF

PD

FA
SAT985A

b. Place brake band on periphery of reverse clutch drum, and


insert band strut into end of band servo piston stem. RA

BR

ST

RS
SAT986A

c. Install anchor end pin on transmission case. Then, tighten


anchor end pin just enough so that reverse clutch drum (clutch BT
pack) will not tilt forward.
HA

EL

IDX
SAT987A

AT-337
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
2. Install input shaft on transmission case.
I Pay attention to its direction — O-ring groove side is front.
3. Install gasket on transmission case.

SAT988A

4. Install oil pump assembly.


a. Install needle bearing on oil pump assembly.
I Apply petroleum jelly to the needle bearing.
b. Install selected thrust washer on oil pump assembly.
I Apply petroleum jelly to thrust washer.

SAT989A

c. Carefully install seal rings into grooves and press them into the
petroleum jelly so that they are a tight fit.

SAT990A

d. Install O-ring on oil pump assembly.


I Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.

SAT991A

e. Apply petroleum jelly to mating surface of transmission case


and oil pump assembly.

SAT992A

AT-338
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
f. Install oil pump assembly.
I Install two converter housing securing bolts in bolt holes GI
in oil pump assembly as guides.

MA

EM

LC
SAT993A

I Insert oil pump assembly to the specified position in


transmission, as shown at left. EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT994A

5. Install O-ring on input shaft.


I Apply ATF to O-rings. AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT114B

6. Install converter housing.


a. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine anaerobic liquid RA
gasket, Three Bond TB1215, Locktite Part No. 51813 or
equivalent) to outer periphery of bolt holes in converter hous-
ing. BR
I Do not apply too much sealant.
ST

RS
SAT397C

b. Apply recommended sealant (Genuine anaerobic liquid


gasket, Three Bond TB1215, Locktite Part No. 51813 or BT
equivalent) to seating surfaces of bolts that secure front of
converter housing.
c. Install converter housing on transmission case.
HA

EL

IDX
SAT158G

AT-339
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
7. Adjust brake band.
a. Tighten anchor end bolt to specified torque.
Anchor end bolt:
: 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)
b. Back off anchor end bolt two and a half turns.

SAT001B

c. While holding anchor end pin, tighten lock nut.

SAT002B

8. Install terminal cord assembly.


a. Install O-ring on terminal cord assembly.
I Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring.
b. Compress terminal cord assembly stopper and install terminal
cord assembly on transmission case.

SAT115B

9. Install control valve assembly.


a. Install accumulator piston return springs B, C and D.
Free length of return springs:
Refer to SDS, AT-345.

SAT004BA

b. Install manual valve on control valve.


I Apply ATF to manual valve.

SAT005B

AT-340
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
c. Place control valve assembly on transmission case. Connect
solenoid connector for upper body. GI
d. Install connector clip.

MA

EM

LC
SAT006B

e. Install control valve assembly on transmission case.


f. Install connector tube brackets and tighten bolts A and B. EC
I Check that terminal assembly does not catch.
Bolt symbol  mm (in) FE
A 33 (1.30)

B 45 (1.77) CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA
SAT353B

g. Install O-ring on oil strainer.


I Apply petroleum jelly to O-ring. RA
h. Install oil strainer on control valve.
BR

ST

RS
SAT221B

i. Securely fasten terminal harness with clips.


BT

HA

EL

IDX
SAT009B

AT-341
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
j. Install torque converter clutch solenoid valve and fluid tem-
perature sensor connectors.

SAT010B

10. Install oil pan.


a. Attach a magnet to oil pan.

SAT011B

b. Install new oil pan gasket on transmission case.


c. Install oil pan and bracket on transmission case.
I Always replace oil pan bolts as they are self-sealing bolts.
I Before installing bolts, remove traces of sealant and oil
from mating surface and thread holes.
I Tighten four bolts in a criss-cross pattern to prevent dis-
location of gasket.
d. Tighten drain plug.

SAT365I

11. Install park/neutral position (PNP) switch.


a. Check that manual shaft is in 1 position.
b. Temporarily install park/neutral position (PNP) switch on
manual shaft.
c. Move manual shaft to N.

SAT299I

d. Tighten bolts while inserting 4.0 mm (0.157 in) dia. pin verti-
cally into locating holes in park/neutral position (PNP) switch
and manual shaft.

SAT014B

AT-342
ASSEMBLY
Assembly (2) (Cont’d)
12. Install torque converter.
a. Pour ATF into torque converter. GI
I Approximately 2 liters (2-1/8 US qt, 1-3/4 Imp qt) of fluid
are required for a new torque converter.
I When reusing old torque converter, add the same amount
MA
of fluid as was drained.
EM

LC
SAT428DA

b. Install torque converter while aligning notches and oil pump.


EC

FE

CL

MT
SAT016B

c. Measure distance A to check that torque converter is in proper


position. AT
Distance “A”:
26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more
TF

PD

FA
SAT017B

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-343
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
General Specifications

General Specifications NEAT0160

VG33E engine
Applied model
4WD

Automatic transmission model RE4R01A

Transmission model code number 43X21

Stall torque ratio 2.0 : 1

1st 2.785

2nd 1.545

Transmission gear ratio Top 1.000

OD 0.694

Reverse 2.272

Nissan Matic “D” (Continental U.S. and Alaska) or Genuine Nissan Automatic Transmission
Recommended fluid
Fluid (Canada)*1

Fluid capacity 8.5 (9 US qt, 7-1/2 Imp qt)

*1: Refer to MA section (“Fluids and Lubricants”, “RECOMMENDED FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS”).

Shift Schedule NEAT0178


VEHICLE SPEED WHEN SHIFTING GEARS THROTTLE POSITION NEAT0178S01

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)


Throttle position
D1, D2 D2 , D 3 D3, D4 D4, D3 D3 , D 2 D2, D1 12, 11

47 - 51 92 - 100 146 - 156 141 - 151 87 - 95 42 - 46 43 - 47


Full throttle
(29 - 32) (57 - 62) (91 - 97) (88 - 94) (54 - 59) (26 - 29) (27 - 29)

34 - 38 68 - 74 132 - 140 59 - 67 31 - 37 10 - 14 43 - 47
Half throttle
(21 - 24) (42 - 46) (82 - 87) (37 - 42) (19 - 23) (6 - 9) (27 - 29)

VEHICLE SPEED WHEN PERFORMING AND RELEASING LOCK-UP NEAT0178S02

Vehicle speed km/h (MPH)


Overdrive control switch [Shift posi-
Throttle position
tion]
Lock-up “ON” Lock-up “OFF”

ON [D4] 147 - 155 (91 - 96) 142 - 150 (88 - 93)


Full throttle
OFF [D3] 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 71 - 79 (44 - 49)

ON [D4] 139 - 147 (86 - 91) 84 - 92 (52 - 57)


Half throttle
OFF [D3] 74 - 82 (46 - 51) 71 - 79 (44 - 49)

Stall Revolution NEAT0163

Stall revolution rpm 2,420 - 2,620

Line Pressure NEAT0164

Engine speed Line pressure kPa (kg/cm2, psi)


rpm D, 2 and 1 positions R position

Idle 422 - 461 (4.3 - 4.7, 61 - 67) 667 - 706 (6.8 - 7.2, 97 - 102)

Stall 1,020 - 1,098 (10.4 - 11.2, 148 - 159) 1,422 - 1,500 (14.5 - 15.3, 206 - 218)

AT-344
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Return Springs

Return Springs NEAT0165


Unit: mm (in)
GI
Item
Parts
Part No. Free length Outer diameter MA
Torque converter relief valve spring 31742-41X23 38.0 (1.496) 9.0 (0.354)

Pressure regulator valve spring 31742-41X24 44.02 (1.7331) 14.0 (0.551) EM


Pressure modifier valve spring 31742-41X19 31.95 (1.2579) 6.8 (0.268)

Accumulator control valve spring — — — LC


Shuttle shift valve D spring 31762-41X01 25.0 (0.984) 7.0 (0.276)

4-2 sequence valve spring 31756-41X00 29.1 (1.146) 6.95 (0.2736) EC


Shift valve B spring 31762-41X01 25.0 (0.984) 7.0 (0.276)
Upper body
4-2 relay valve spring 31756-41X00 29.1 (1.146) 6.95 (0.2736) FE
Shift valve A spring 31762-41X01 25.0 (0.984) 7.0 (0.276)
Control valve
Overrun clutch control valve spring 31762-41X03 23.6 (0.929) 7.0 (0.276) CL
Overrun clutch reducing valve spring 31742-41X20 32.5 (1.280) 7.0 (0.276)

Shuttle shift valve S spring 31762-41X04 51.0 (2.008) 5.65 (0.2224) MT


Pilot valve spring 31742-41X13 25.7 (1.012) 9.1 (0.358)

Lock-up control valve spring 31742-41X22 18.5 (0.728) 13.0 (0.512) AT


Modifier accumulator valve spring 31742-27X70 31.4 (1.236) 9.8 (0.386)

1st reducing valve spring 31756-41X05 25.4 (1.000) 6.75 (0.2657)


Lower body
TF
3-2 timing valve spring 31742-41X06 23.0 (0.906) 6.7 (0.264)

Servo charger valve spring 31742-41X06 23.0 (0.906) 6.7 (0.264)


PD
31521-41X02
Reverse clutch 16 pcs 19.7 (0.7756) 11.6 (0.457)
(Assembly)

31521-41X03 FA
High clutch 10 pcs 24.2 (0.9528) 11.6 (0.457)
(Assembly)

31521-41X00
Forward clutch (Overrun clutch) 20 pcs
(Assembly)
35.77 (1.4083) 9.7 (0.382) RA
31655-41X00
Low & reverse brake 18 pcs 22.3 (0.878) 11.2 (0.441)
(Assembly)
BR
Spring A 31605-41X05 45.6 (1.795) 34.3 (1.350)

Band servo Spring B 31605-41X00 53.8 (2.118) 40.3 (1.587)


ST
Spring C 31605-41X01 29.7 (1.169) 27.6 (1.087)

Accumulator A 31605-41X02 43.0 (1.693) 18.0 (0.709)


RS
Accumulator B 31605-41X10 66.0 (2.598) 20.0 (0.787)
Accumulator
Accumulator C 31605-41X09 45.0 (1.772) 29.3 (1.154)
BT
Accumulator D 31605-41X06 58.4 (2.299) 17.3 (0.681)

HA

EL

IDX

AT-345
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Accumulator O-ring

Accumulator O-ring NEAT0166

Diameter mm (in)
Accumulator
A B C D

Small diameter end 29 (1.14) 32 (1.26) 45 (1.77) 29 (1.14)

Large diameter end 45 (1.77) 50 (1.97) 50 (1.97) 45 (1.77)

Clutches and Brakes NEAT0167


REVERSE CLUTCH NEAT0167S01

Code number 43X21

Number of drive plates 2

Number of driven plates 2

Standard 1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)


Thickness of drive plate mm (in)
Wear limit 1.80 (0.0709)

Standard 0.5 - 0.8 (0.020 - 0.031)


Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit 1.2 (0.047)

Thickness mm (in) Part number

4.8 (0.189) 31537-42X02


Thickness of retaining plate 5.0 (0.197) 31537-42X03
5.2 (0.205) 31537-42X04
5.4 (0.213) 31537-42X05
5.6 (0.220) 31537-42X06

HIGH CLUTCH NEAT0167S02

Code number 43X21

Number of drive plates 5

Number of driven plates 5

Standard 1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)


Thickness of drive plate mm (in)
Wear limit 1.40 (0.0551)

Standard 1.8 - 2.2 (0.071 - 0.087)


Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit 2.8 (0.110)

Thickness mm (in) Part number

3.4 (0.134) 31537-41X71


3.6 (0.142) 31537-41X61
3.8 (0.150) 31537-41X62
Thickness of retaining plate
4.0 (0.157) 31537-41X63
4.2 (0.165) 31537-41X64
4.4 (0.173) 31537-41X65
4.6 (0.181) 31537-41X66
4.8 (0.189) 31537-41X67

AT-346
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clutches and Brakes (Cont’d)
FORWARD CLUTCH NEAT0167S03
GI
Code number 43X21

Number of drive plates 6


MA
Number of driven plates 6

Standard 1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)


Thickness of drive plate mm (in) EM
Wear limit 1.40 (0.0551)

Standard 0.35 - 0.75 (0.0138 - 0.0295)


Clearance mm (in) LC
Allowable limit 1.85 (0.0728)

Thickness mm (in) Part number

8.0 (0.315) 31537-41X00


EC
8.1 (0.319) 31537-42X60
8.2 (0.323) 31537-41X01
8.3 (0.327) 31537-42X61 FE
8.4 (0.331) 31537-41X02
Thickness of retaining plate 8.5 (0.335) 31537-42X62
8.6 (0.339) 31537-41X03
8.7 (0.343) 31537-42X63 CL
8.8 (0.346) 31537-41X04
8.9 (0.350) 31537-42X64
9.0 (0.354) 31537-41X05
9.1 (0.358) 31537-42X65
MT
9.2 (0.362) 31537-41X06

OVERRUN CLUTCH AT
NEAT0167S04

Code number 43X21

Number of drive plates 3


TF
Number of driven plates 5

Standard 1.90 - 2.05 (0.0748 - 0.0807)


PD
Thickness of drive plate mm (in)
Wear limit 1.80 (0.0709)

Standard 1.0 - 1.4 (0.039 - 0.055) FA


Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit 2.0 (0.079)

Thickness mm (in) Part number RA


4.2 (0.165) 31537-41X80
Thickness of retaining plate 4.4 (0.173) 31537-41X81
4.6 (0.181) 31537-41X82 BR
4.8 (0.189) 31537-41X83
5.0 (0.197) 31537-41X84
ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-347
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Clutches and Brakes (Cont’d)
LOW & REVERSE BRAKE NEAT0167S05

Code number 43X21

Number of drive plates 7

Number of driven plates 7

Standard 1.52 - 1.67 (0.0598 - 0.0657)


Thickness of drive plate mm (in)
Wear limit 1.40 (0.0551)

Standard 0.8 - 1.1 (0.031 - 0.043)


Clearance mm (in)
Allowable limit 2.3 (0.091)

Thickness mm (in) Part number

6.6 (0.260) 31667-41X17


6.8 (0.268) 31667-41X11
7.0 (0.276) 31667-41X12
7.2 (0.283) 31667-41X13
7.4 (0.291) 31667-41X14
Thickness of retaining plate 7.6 (0.299) 31667-41X07
7.8 (0.307) 31667-41X08
8.0 (0.315) 31667-41X00
8.2 (0.323) 31667-41X01
8.4 (0.331) 31667-41X02
8.6 (0.339) 31667-41X03
8.8 (0.346) 31667-41X04
9.0 (0.354) 31667-41X05

BRAKE BAND NEAT0167S06

Anchor end bolt tightening torque 4 - 6 N·m (0.4 - 0.6 kg-m, 35 - 52 in-lb)

Number of returning revolution for anchor end bolt 2.5

Oil Pump and Low One-way Clutch NEAT0168


Unit: mm (in)

Cam ring — oil pump housing Standard 0.01 - 0.024 (0.0004 - 0.0009)
Oil pump clearance Rotor, vanes and control piston — oil
Standard 0.03 - 0.044 (0.0012 - 0.0017)
pump housing

Standard 0.10 - 0.25 (0.0039 - 0.0098)


Seal ring clearance
Allowable limit 0.25 (0.0098)

Total End Play NEAT0169

Total end play “T1” 0.25 - 0.55 mm (0.0098 - 0.0217 in)

Thickness mm (in) Part number

0.8 (0.031) 31435-41X01


1.0 (0.039) 31435-41X02
Thickness of oil pump cover bearing race 1.2 (0.047) 31435-41X03
1.4 (0.055) 31435-41X04
1.6 (0.063) 31435-41X05
1.8 (0.071) 31435-41X06
2.0 (0.079) 31435-41X07

AT-348
SERVICE DATA AND SPECIFICATIONS (SDS)
Reverse Clutch Drum End Play

Reverse Clutch Drum End Play NEAT0170 GI


Reverse clutch drum end play “T2” 0.55 - 0.90 mm (0.0217 - 0.0354 in)

Thickness mm (in) Part number


MA
0.9 (0.035) 31528-21X01
1.1 (0.043) 31528-21X02
Thickness of oil pump thrust washer
1.3 (0.051) 31528-21X03
1.5 (0.059) 31528-21X04
EM
1.7 (0.067) 31528-21X05
1.9 (0.075) 31528-21X06
LC
Removal and Installation NEAT0171

Number of returning revolutions for lock nut 2 EC


Manual control linkage 4.4 - 5.9 N·m (0.45 - 0.60 kg-m, 39.1 - 52.1
Lock nut tightening torque
in-lb)
FE
Distance between end of clutch housing and torque converter 26.0 mm (1.024 in) or more

CL

MT

AT

TF

PD

FA

RA

BR

ST

RS

BT

HA

EL

IDX

AT-349
NOTES

AT-350

You might also like